US20230356150A1 - Materials and methods for producing blood products - Google Patents

Materials and methods for producing blood products Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230356150A1
US20230356150A1 US18/341,700 US202318341700A US2023356150A1 US 20230356150 A1 US20230356150 A1 US 20230356150A1 US 202318341700 A US202318341700 A US 202318341700A US 2023356150 A1 US2023356150 A1 US 2023356150A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
platelets
composition
less
class
antibodies
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US18/341,700
Inventor
Joshua Donald Montgomery
Braden Carl Ishler
Stephen Edward Amos
Keith Andrew Moskowitz
Amber Nicole Lee
Rafael Jorda
Glen Michael FITZPATRICK
Michael Alexander Mathews
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Cellphire Inc
Original Assignee
Cellphire Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Cellphire Inc filed Critical Cellphire Inc
Priority to US18/341,700 priority Critical patent/US20230356150A1/en
Assigned to CELLPHIRE, INC. reassignment CELLPHIRE, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ISHLER, BRADEN CARL, FITZPATRICK, GLEN MICHAEL, JORDA, RAFAEL, LEE, Amber Nicole, MATHEWS, MICHAEL ALEXANDER, MONTGOMERY, JOSHUA DONALD, AMOS, Stephen Edward, MOSKOWITZ, Keith Andrew
Publication of US20230356150A1 publication Critical patent/US20230356150A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61MDEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
    • A61M1/00Suction or pumping devices for medical purposes; Devices for carrying-off, for treatment of, or for carrying-over, body-liquids; Drainage systems
    • A61M1/34Filtering material out of the blood by passing it through a membrane, i.e. hemofiltration or diafiltration
    • A61M1/3413Diafiltration
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01DSEPARATION
    • B01D61/00Processes of separation using semi-permeable membranes, e.g. dialysis, osmosis or ultrafiltration; Apparatus, accessories or auxiliary operations specially adapted therefor
    • B01D61/14Ultrafiltration; Microfiltration
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K35/14Blood; Artificial blood
    • A61K35/19Platelets; Megacaryocytes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61MDEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
    • A61M1/00Suction or pumping devices for medical purposes; Devices for carrying-off, for treatment of, or for carrying-over, body-liquids; Drainage systems
    • A61M1/02Blood transfusion apparatus
    • A61M1/0281Apparatus for treatment of blood or blood constituents prior to transfusion, e.g. washing, filtering or thawing
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61MDEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
    • A61M1/00Suction or pumping devices for medical purposes; Devices for carrying-off, for treatment of, or for carrying-over, body-liquids; Drainage systems
    • A61M1/34Filtering material out of the blood by passing it through a membrane, i.e. hemofiltration or diafiltration
    • A61M1/3496Plasmapheresis; Leucopheresis; Lymphopheresis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61MDEVICES FOR INTRODUCING MEDIA INTO, OR ONTO, THE BODY; DEVICES FOR TRANSDUCING BODY MEDIA OR FOR TAKING MEDIA FROM THE BODY; DEVICES FOR PRODUCING OR ENDING SLEEP OR STUPOR
    • A61M1/00Suction or pumping devices for medical purposes; Devices for carrying-off, for treatment of, or for carrying-over, body-liquids; Drainage systems
    • A61M1/36Other treatment of blood in a by-pass of the natural circulatory system, e.g. temperature adaptation, irradiation ; Extra-corporeal blood circuits
    • A61M1/38Removing constituents from donor blood and storing or returning remainder to body, e.g. for transfusion
    • A61M1/382Optimisation of blood component yield
    • A61M1/385Optimisation of blood component yield taking into account of the patient characteristics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N5/00Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, e.g. cell lines; Tissues; Cultivation or maintenance thereof; Culture media therefor
    • C12N5/06Animal cells or tissues; Human cells or tissues
    • C12N5/0602Vertebrate cells
    • C12N5/0634Cells from the blood or the immune system
    • C12N5/0644Platelets; Megakaryocytes
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01DSEPARATION
    • B01D2311/00Details relating to membrane separation process operations and control
    • B01D2311/12Addition of chemical agents
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01DSEPARATION
    • B01D2315/00Details relating to the membrane module operation
    • B01D2315/10Cross-flow filtration
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01DSEPARATION
    • B01D2315/00Details relating to the membrane module operation
    • B01D2315/16Diafiltration
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2531/00Microcarriers

Definitions

  • the present disclosure generally relates to blood products, such as blood products with reduced HLA antibody content, and methods of producing such blood products.
  • Blood is a complex mixture of numerous components.
  • blood can be described as comprising four main parts: red blood cells, white blood cells, platelets, and plasma.
  • the first three are cellular or cell-like components, whereas the fourth (plasma) is a liquid component comprising a wide and variable mixture of salts, proteins, and other factors necessary for numerous bodily functions.
  • the components of blood can be separated from each other by various methods. In general, differential centrifugation is most commonly used currently to separate the different components of blood based on size and, in some applications, density.
  • Inactivated platelets which are also commonly referred to as thrombocytes, are small, often irregularly-shaped (e.g., discoidal or ovoidal) megakaryocyte-derived components of blood that are involved in the clotting process. They aid in protecting the body from excessive blood loss due not only to trauma or injury, but to normal physiological activity as well. Platelets are considered crucial in normal hemostasis, providing the first line of defense against blood escaping from injured blood vessels. Platelets generally function by adhering to the lining of broken blood vessels, in the process becoming activated, changing to an amorphous shape, and interacting with components of the clotting system that are present in plasma or are released by the platelets themselves or other components of the blood.
  • thrombocytes are small, often irregularly-shaped (e.g., discoidal or ovoidal) megakaryocyte-derived components of blood that are involved in the clotting process. They aid in protecting the body from excessive blood loss due not only to trauma or injury, but to normal physiological activity as well. Plate
  • Purified platelets have found use in treating subjects with low platelet count (thrombocytopenia) and abnormal platelet function (thrombasthenia). Concentrated platelets are often used to control bleeding after injury or during acquired platelet function defects or deficiencies, for example those occurring during surgery and those due to the presence of platelet inhibitors.
  • blood products e.g., a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • free protein e.g., antibodies (e.g., Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA) antibodies, or Human Neutrophil Antigen (HNA) antibodies)
  • HLA Human Leukocyte Antigen
  • HNA Human Neutrophil Antigen
  • compositions including platelets and an aqueous medium, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration of the aqueous medium can be less than 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can be a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be determined by absorbance at 280 nanometers (nm) with a path length of 0.5 cm. In some embodiments, the absorbance at 280 nm can be less than 1.7 AU. In some embodiments, the absorbance at 280 nm can be less than 1.66 AU. In some embodiments, the absorbance at 280 nm can be less than 1.6 AU.
  • the platelet count can be at least 200 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L. In some embodiments, the platelet count can be at least 2250 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L. In some embodiments, the composition can have an erythrocyte count less than 0.2 ⁇ 10 6 erythrocytes/ ⁇ L. In some embodiments, the composition can further include erythrocytes. In some embodiments, the erythrocyte count can be less than 0.2 ⁇ 10 6 erythrocytes/ ⁇ L.
  • the composition can be negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The composition can be negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The composition can be negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 1%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs can be less than 1%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs can be less than 1%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, can be less than 1%.
  • the aqueous medium can further include a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • the buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • the base can be sodium bicarbonate.
  • the loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof. The monosaccharide can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • the monosaccharide can be trehalose.
  • the polysaccharide can be polysucrose.
  • the salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • the organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • the composition can be prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, centrifugation of a starting material comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • TFF tangential flow filtration
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the starting material can be (a) positive for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (b) positive for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (c) positive for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, or (d) one or more of (a), (b), and (c).
  • the starting material can have a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/ml.
  • the starting material can include donor blood product.
  • the donor blood product can be pooled donor blood product.
  • the starting material can include donor apheresis material.
  • the TFF can include concentrating.
  • the TFF can include diafiltering.
  • the diafiltering can include diafiltering with at least two diavolumes.
  • the TFF can include buffer exchange.
  • the TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 1 ⁇ m.
  • the TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 0.45 ⁇ m.
  • the TFF can be performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • the TFF can include buffer exchange into a buffer comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • the buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • the base can be sodium bicarbonate.
  • the loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • the monosaccharide can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • the monosaccharide can be trehalose.
  • the polysaccharide can be polysucrose.
  • the salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • the organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • the centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1400 ⁇ g to about 1550 ⁇ g.
  • the centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1450 ⁇ g to about 1500 ⁇ g.
  • the process can lack centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets.
  • the composition can include less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • the composition can include less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • the composition can include less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • the composition can include less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 85%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 70%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 75%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 15%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 82%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 85%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L.
  • the platelet derivatives can include thrombosomes.
  • Also provided herein is a process for preparing a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium, the process including tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, centrifugation of a starting material comprising platelets, or a combination thereof, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • TMF tangential flow filtration
  • the starting material can be (a) positive for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (b) positive for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (c) positive for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, or (d) one or more of a), b), and c).
  • the starting material can have a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/mL.
  • the starting material can include donor blood product.
  • the donor blood product can be pooled donor blood product.
  • the starting material can include donor apheresis material.
  • the TFF can include concentrating.
  • the TFF can include diafiltering.
  • the diafiltration can include diafiltering with at least two diavolumes.
  • the TFF can include buffer exchange.
  • the TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 1 ⁇ m.
  • the TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 0.45 ⁇ m.
  • the TFF can be performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • the TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • the TFF can include buffer exchange into a buffer comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • the buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • the base can be sodium bicarbonate.
  • the loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • the monosaccharide can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • the monosaccharide can be trehalose.
  • the polysaccharide can be polysucrose.
  • the salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • the organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • the centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1400 ⁇ g to about 1550 ⁇ g.
  • the centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1450 ⁇ g to about 1500 ⁇ g.
  • the process can lack centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the protein concentration can be less than 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • the composition can be negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • the composition can be negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • the composition can be negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 1%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 1%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, can be less than 1%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs can be less than 5%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs can be less than 3%.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs can be less than 1%.
  • the composition can include less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • the composition can include less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • the composition can include less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 85%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 70%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 75%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 15%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 82%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 85%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L.
  • the aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L.
  • the platelet derivatives can include thrombosomes.
  • the process can further include a pathogen reduction step.
  • the pathogen reduction step can precede TFF.
  • the process can further include lyophilizing the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • the process can further include thermally treating the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • compositions including platelets and an aqueous medium prepared by any of the processes described herein.
  • Also provided herein is a process for preparing freeze-dried platelets, including (a) preparing a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium using any of the processes described herein and (b) freeze-drying the composition comprising platelets and the aqueous medium.
  • composition comprising freeze-dried platelets, prepared by any of the processes described herein.
  • Also provided herein is a method for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the method including diluting a starting material comprising platelets to form a diluted starting material, concentrating the platelets to about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 cells/4, ( ⁇ 250 ⁇ 10 3 ) to form a concentrated platelet composition, and washing the concentrated platelet composition with at least 2 diavolumes (DV) of the preparation agent to form a TFF-treated composition.
  • a method for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the method including diluting a starting material comprising platelets to form a diluted starting material, concentrating the platelets to about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 cells/4, ( ⁇ 250 ⁇ 10 3 ) to form a concentrated platelet composition, and washing the concentrated platelet composition with at least 2 diavolumes (DV) of the preparation agent to form a TFF-treated composition.
  • DV diavolumes
  • Diluting can include diluting with an approximately equal weight ( ⁇ 10%) of the preparation agent.
  • the method can further include a pathogen reduction step.
  • the pathogen reduction step can occur before diluting the starting material.
  • the residual plasma percentage can be less than about 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content).
  • the method can further include diluting the preparation agent or can be concentrated to fall within this range.
  • the method can further include lyophilizing the TFF-treated composition to form a lyophilized composition.
  • the method can further include treating the lyophilized composition at about 80° C. for about 24 hours.
  • composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives prepared by any of the methods described herein.
  • the materials and methods described herein can provide several advantages. First, they can allow for the collection of otherwise deferred donors and reduce the competition for apheresis materials.
  • FIG. 1 A shows initial gate placement for identification of Class I and Class II HLA FLOWPRATM beads in PBS using side scattering vs. forward scattering.
  • FIG. 1 B shows initial gate placement for identification of Class I and Class II HLA FLOWPRATM beads in PBS using phycoerythrin fluorescence vs. forward scattering.
  • FIG. 2 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (in triplicate), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class I HLA (in triplicate).
  • PPP supplier platelet-poor plasma
  • Class I HLA donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class I HLA
  • FIG. 2 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (in triplicate), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class II HLA (in triplicate).
  • PPP supplier platelet-poor plasma
  • Class II HLA donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class II HLA
  • FIG. 2 C shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (single data set), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class I HLA (single data set).
  • PPP supplier platelet-poor plasma
  • Class I HLA single data set
  • FIG. 2 D shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (single data set), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class II HLA (single data set).
  • PPP supplier platelet-poor plasma
  • Class II HLA single data set
  • FIG. 3 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in George King PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 3 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in George King PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 4 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 1 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 4 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 1 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 5 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 2 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 5 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 2 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 6 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 3 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 6 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 3 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 7 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 4 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 7 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 4 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 8 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 5 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 8 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 5 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 9 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 6 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 9 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 6 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 10 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 7 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 10 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads in Donor 7 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 11 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 11 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 12 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to 50% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 12 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to 50% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 13 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 8% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 13 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 8% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 14 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 6% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 14 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 6% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 15 A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 1% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FFF tangential flow filtration
  • FIG. 15 B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRATM beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 1% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FFF tangential flow filtration
  • FIG. 16 shows exemplary flow cytometry data of thrombosomes unstained (dark data points) or stained (light data points) with an anti-CD-41 antibody.
  • FIG. 17 shows an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes incubated with annexin V with (light data points) and without (dark data points) calcium.
  • FIG. 18 shows an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes incubated with an anti-CD62 antibody (light data points) or with an isotype control (dark data points).
  • FIG. 19 shows a plot of thrombin peak height for thrombosomes in the presence of PRP Reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids (solid line and long dashes) and control cephalin (dots).
  • FIG. 20 is an exemplary histogram comparison of low-plasma thrombosomes unstained (black) or stained with an isotype control antibody (dark gray) or a FITC-labeled 9F9 antibody (light gray), and a table showing the mean fluorescence intensity for two replicates.
  • FIG. 21 is an exemplary histogram comparison of low-plasma thrombosomes unstained (black) or stained with an anti-PAC-1 antibody (light gray), and a table showing the mean fluorescence intensity for two replicates.
  • FIG. 22 A is a plot of the mean fluorescence intensity of thrombosomes (1 ⁇ 10 6 cells) treated with various concentrations of a labeled anti-CD47 antibody or an isotype control.
  • FIG. 22 B is an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes that were unstained (black), stained with an isotype control antibody (dark gray), or stained with an anti-CD47 antibody (light gray).
  • FIG. 22 C is a plot of the mean fluorescence intensity of thrombosomes (250,000 cells) treated with various concentrations of a labeled anti-CD47 antibody or an isotype control.
  • FIG. 22 D is an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes that were unstained (black), stained with an isotype control antibody (dark gray), or stained with an anti-CD47 antibody (light gray).
  • FIG. 23 A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch J) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by dynamic light scattering (DLS).
  • FIG. 23 B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch K) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 23 C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch L) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 24 A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch D) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 24 B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch E) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 24 C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch F) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 25 A is an exemplary schematic of a pathogen reduction system.
  • FIG. 25 B is a plot of the weight of a reaction vessel over time.
  • FIG. 25 C is a plot of pressure in a reaction vessel over time.
  • FIG. 26 A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in rehydrated thrombosomes that were (Batch N) or were not (Batch M) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 26 B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in rehydrated thrombosomes that were (Batch K) or were not (Batch J) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 27 A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs that were (Batch N) or were not (Batch M) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 27 B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch M) that were not treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 27 C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch N) that were treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 28 A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs that were (Batch K) or were not (Batch J) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 28 B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch J) that were not treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 28 C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch K) that were treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 29 A is a bar plot of the transmittance of platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof using light transmission aggregometry.
  • FIG. 29 B is a bar plot of the platelet (and/or thrombosome) count of platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof following aggregation.
  • FIG. 29 C is a bar plot of the transmittance of platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof in light transmission aggregometry.
  • FIG. 30 is a bar plot of the transmittance of thrombin-activated platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof in the presence and absence of GPRP.
  • FIG. 31 is a bar plot of the percent aggregation of PMA-activated platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof in the presence and absence of RGDS.
  • FIG. 33 A is a plot of thrombosome adhesion under shear in whole blood.
  • FIG. 33 B is a plot of thrombosome adhesion under shear in plasma.
  • FIG. 33 C shows formation of fibrin in a microcapillary channel in the absence of GPRP.
  • FIG. 33 D shows a lack of formation of fibrin in a microcapillary channel in the presence of GPRP.
  • FIG. 33 E is a plot of the effect of GPRP on thrombosome adhesion under shear in plasma.
  • platelet can include whole platelets, fragmented platelets, and platelet derivatives.
  • a disclosed range of 1-10 includes 1-9, 1-5, 2-10, 3.1-6, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and so forth.
  • each disclosed range includes up to 5% lower for the lower value of the range and up to 5% higher for the higher value of the range.
  • a disclosed range of 4-10 includes 3.8-10.5. This concept is captured in this document by the term “about”.
  • platelet can include whole platelets, fragmented platelets, platelet derivatives, or thrombosomes.
  • Platelets within the above definition may include, for example, platelets in whole blood, platelets in plasma, platelets in buffer optionally supplemented with select plasma proteins, cold stored platelets, dried platelets, cryopreserved platelets, thawed cryopreserved platelets, rehydrated dried platelets, rehydrated cryopreserved platelets, lyopreserved platelets, thawed lyopreserved platelets, or rehydrated lyopreserved platelets.
  • Platelets may be “platelets” of mammals, such as of humans, or such as of non-human mammals.
  • thrombosomes are platelet derivatives that have been treated with a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein) and lyopreserved (such as freeze-dried). In some cases, thrombosomes can be prepared from pooled platelets. Thrombosomes can have a shelf life of 2-3 years in dry form at ambient temperature and can be rehydrated with sterile water within minutes for immediate infusion. One example of thrombosomes are THROMBOSOMES®, which are in clinical trials for the treatment of acute hemorrhage in thrombocytopenic patients.
  • Transfusion-related acute lung injury is a condition believed to be caused by the presence of antibodies (e.g., Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA), Human Neutrophil Antigen (HNA), or granulocyte antibodies) in a transfused blood product, which can react with antigens in a transfusion recipient.
  • antibodies e.g., Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA), Human Neutrophil Antigen (HNA), or granulocyte antibodies
  • HLA Human Leukocyte Antigen
  • Class II Class II
  • neutrophil-specific antibodies are banned from use in transfusion or production of human-derived platelet products (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) and are therefore omitted from the donor pool.
  • human-derived platelet products e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • tangential flow filtration or multi-pass centrifugation can reduce the amount of antibody in a blood product, for example, to limits not detectable by current, FDA-approved, testing methods.
  • reduction of certain plasma components e.g., HLA antibodies
  • blood products e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • Thrombosomes or cryopreserved platelet production can be limited by the availability of licensed apheresis collections performed at blood donor centers around the United States. Competition for these products can be fierce, and distribution for blood product manufacturing needs is usually prioritized below the needs of patient care. Blood product manufacturing (e.g., scale-up), could be aided by apheresis collections from otherwise deferred donors. One way this could be accomplished is by reducing free antibody levels in donor plasma to meet current, FDA approved, testing thresholds by utilizing tangential flow filtration (TFF) or centrifugation and plasma removal. Centrifugation of the raw materials (e.g., donor plasma), while typically more time consuming than TFF, can have a similar effect on the raw material.
  • TFF tangential flow filtration
  • removal of the donor plasma and replacement with buffer can allow the inventors to manufacture and characterize a final product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) with a reduced protein (e.g., antibody (e.g., HLA antibody or HNA antibody)) content (e.g., as measured by absorbance at 280 nm).
  • a final product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a reduced protein e.g., antibody (e.g., HLA antibody or HNA antibody)
  • Such a product can increase the safety for a recipient of the product by reducing the transfusion related cause for TRALI.
  • the materials and methods provided herein can allow previously deferred donors (such as those who screen positive for HLA antibodies or whose donor history presents a risk for positive HLA) to be allowed into the donor pool of raw materials used to manufacture blood products (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)).
  • a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • a reduction in HLA antibodies from the raw materials can allow for a final product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) to be labeled as HLA-reduced, increasing the safety of a product for a recipient.
  • a final product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as provided herein can have no detectable level of HLA antibodies.
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have no detectable level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies.
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as provided herein can have no detectable level of HLA Class I antibodies.
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • detection of antibodies can be carried out using a regulatory agency approved (e.g., FDA cleared) assay.
  • a regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be the LAB SCREENTM Mixed by One Lambda.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSIONTM software.
  • a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product can have a level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies below a reference level.
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product can have a level of HLA Class II antibodies below a reference level.
  • a blood product e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product can have a level of HNA antibodies below a reference level.
  • a reference level can be any appropriate reference level.
  • a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • a blood product e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as provided herein test negative for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • a blood product e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a regulatory agency approved assay e.g., an FDA cleared assay
  • a blood product e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product can test negative for HLA Class II antibodies a in regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • a blood product e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • a regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be the LAB SCREENTM Mixed by One Lambda.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSIONTM software.
  • compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) and an aqueous medium.
  • an aqueous medium can include a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein).
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies below a reference level.
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of HLA Class I antibodies below a reference level.
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of HLA Class II antibodies below a reference level.
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of HNA antibodies below a reference level.
  • a reference level can be any appropriate reference level.
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for HLA Class I antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for HLA Class II antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • a regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be the LABSCREENTM Mixed by One Lambda.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSIONTM software.
  • an aqueous medium can have a reduced amount of residual plasma compared to donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma) can be a percentage of residual plasma (e.g., less than or equal to about 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1% of residual plasma).
  • donor apheresis plasma e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma
  • a percentage of residual plasma e.g., less than or equal to about 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.
  • an aqueous medium can have a reduced amount of residual plasma compared to donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma) can be a percentage range of residual plasma (e.g., about 5% to about 50%, about 5% to about 40%, about 5% to about 30%, about 5% to about 20%, about 5% to about 15%, about 5% to about 10%, about 10% to about 20%, about 7% to about 15%, about 7% to about 10%, about 8% to about 15%, about 8% to about 10%, about 0.1% to about 5%, about 0.1% to about 3%, about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.5% to about 3%, about 0.5% to about 1%, or about 1% to about 3% of residual plasma).
  • donor apheresis plasma e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma
  • residual plasma e.g.,
  • an aqueous medium can have a protein concentration less than or equal to about 50% (e.g., less than or equal to about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma).
  • donor apheresis plasma e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma.
  • an aqueous medium can have a protein concentration of about 5% to about 50% (e.g., about 5% to about 40%, about 5% to about 30%, about 5% to about 20%, about 5% to about 15%, about 5% to about 10%, about 10% to about 20%, about 7% to about 15%, about 7% to about 10%, about 8% to about 15%, or about 8% to about 10%) of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma).
  • donor apheresis plasma e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma.
  • an aqueous medium can have a protein concentration of about 0.1% to about 5% (e.g., about 0.1% to about 3%, about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.5% to about 3%, about 0.5% to about 1%, about 1% to about 2%, or about 1% to about 3%) of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma).
  • donor apheresis plasma e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma.
  • a protein concentration can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • a protein concentration can be measured by absorbance at 280 nm (A280).
  • an aqueous medium can have an A280 that is less that is less than 1.70 AU (e.g., less than 1.66, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, 1.3, 1.2, 1.1, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 AU) with a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • 1.70 AU e.g., less than 1.66, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, 1.3, 1.2, 1.1, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 AU
  • an aqueous medium can have a HLA Class I antibody concentration less than about 70% (e.g., less than about 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the HLA Class I antibody concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma).
  • a HLA Class I antibody concentration can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • an aqueous medium can have a HLA Class II antibody concentration less than about 50% (e.g., less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the HLA Class II antibody concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma).
  • a HLA Class II antibody concentration can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • an aqueous medium can have a HNA antibody concentration less than about 50% (e.g., less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the HNA antibody concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma).
  • donor apheresis plasma e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma.
  • a HNA antibody concentration can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • a composition as described herein can have a platelet count of at least 10 6 (e.g., at least 5 ⁇ 10 6 , 10 7 , 5 ⁇ 10 7 , 10 8 , 5 ⁇ 10 8 , 10 9 , 5 ⁇ 10 9 , or 10 10 ). In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can have a platelet count of at least about 200 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L (e.g., at least about 300 ⁇ 10 3 , 400 ⁇ 10 3 , 500 ⁇ 10 3 , 750 ⁇ 10 3 , 1000 ⁇ 10 3 , 1500 ⁇ 10 3 , 2000 ⁇ 10 3 , or 2500 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L).
  • a composition as described herein can have a platelet count of at least about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L (e.g., at least about 2050 ⁇ 10 3 , 2100 ⁇ 10 3 , 2150 ⁇ 10 3 , 2200 ⁇ 10 3 , 2250 ⁇ 10 3 , 2300 ⁇ 10 3 , 2350 ⁇ 10 3 , 2400 ⁇ 10 3 , 2450 ⁇ 10 3 , or 2500 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L).
  • a composition as described herein can have a platelet count less than or equal to 1000 ⁇ 10 4 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • a composition as provided herein can include erythrocytes.
  • a composition as provided herein can have an erythrocyte count of less than about 10 10 (e.g., less than 5 ⁇ 10 9 , 10 9 , 5 ⁇ 10 8 , 10 8 , 5 ⁇ 10 7 , 10 7 , 5 ⁇ 10 6 , or 10 6 ).
  • the erythrocyte count can be less than 0.2 ⁇ 10 6 / ⁇ L (e.g., less than 0.1 ⁇ 10 6 / ⁇ L, 0.5 ⁇ 10 5 / ⁇ L, or 0.1 ⁇ 10 5 / ⁇ L).
  • an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • a composition provided herein can include one or more additional components.
  • a composition provided herein can include a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein).
  • the composition can include a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • a buffering agent can be any appropriate buffering agent.
  • a buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • a base can be any appropriate base.
  • a base can be sodium bicarbonate.
  • a loading agent can be any appropriate loading agent.
  • a loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • a loading agent can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • a loading agent can be trehalose.
  • a polysaccharide can be polysucrose.
  • a salt can be any appropriate salt.
  • a salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • An organic solvent can be any appropriate organic solvent.
  • an organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • a preparation agent can include any appropriate components.
  • the preparation agent may comprise a liquid medium.
  • the preparation agent may comprise one or more salts selected from phosphate salts, sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts, and any other salt that can be found in blood or blood products, or that is known to be useful in drying platelets, or any combination of two or more of these.
  • the preparation agent comprises one or more salts, such as phosphate salts, sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts, and any other salt that can be found in blood or blood products.
  • exemplary salts include sodium chloride (NaCl), potassium chloride (KCl), and combinations thereof.
  • the preparation agent includes from about 0.5 mM to about 100 mM of the one or more salts.
  • the preparation agent includes from about 0.5 mM to about 100 mM (e.g., about 0.5 to about 2 mM, about 2 mM to about 90 mM, about 2 mM to about 6 mM, about 50 mM to about 100 mM, about 60 mM to about 90 mM, about 70 to about 85 mM) of the one or more salts.
  • the preparation agent includes about 5 mM, about 75 mM, or about 80 mM of the one or more salts.
  • the preparation agent comprises one or more salts selected from calcium salts, magnesium salts, and a combination of the two, in a concentration of about 0.5 mM to about 2 mM.
  • these salts are present in the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives, such as freeze-dried platelets, at an amount that is about the same as is found in whole blood.
  • the preparation agent further comprises a carrier protein.
  • the carrier protein comprises human serum albumin, bovine serum albumin, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the carrier protein is present in an amount of about 0.05% to about 1.0% (w/v).
  • the preparation agent may be any buffer that is non-toxic to the platelets and provides adequate buffering capacity to the solution at the temperatures at which the solution will be exposed during the process provided herein.
  • the buffer may comprise any of the known biologically compatible buffers available commercially, such as phosphate buffers, such as phosphate buffered saline (PBS), bicarbonate/carbonic acid, such as sodium-bicarbonate buffer, N-2-hydroxyethylpiperazine-N′-2-ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), and tris-based buffers, such as tris-buffered saline (TB S).
  • PBS phosphate buffered saline
  • bicarbonate/carbonic acid such as sodium-bicarbonate buffer
  • HEPES N-2-hydroxyethylpiperazine-N′-2-ethanesulfonic acid
  • T S tris-based buffers, such as tris-buffered saline
  • buffers propane-1,2,3-tricarboxylic (tricarballylic); benzenepentacarboxylic; maleic; 2,2-dimethylsuccinic; EDTA; 3,3-dimethylglutaric; bis(2-hydroxyethyl)imino-tris(hydroxymethyl)-methane (BIS-TRIS); benzenehexacarboxylic (mellitic); N-(2-acetamido)imino-diacetic acid (ADA); butane-1,2,3,4-tetracarboxylic; pyrophosphoric; 1,1-cyclopentanediacetic (3,3 tetramethylene-glutaric acid); piperazine-1,4-bis-(2-ethanesulfonic acid) (PIPES); N-(2-acetamido)-2-amnoethanesulfonic acid (ACES); 1,1-cyclohexanediacetic; 3,6-en
  • the preparation agent includes one or more buffers, e.g., N-2-hydroxyethylpiperazine-N′-2-ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), or sodium-bicarbonate (NaHCO 3 ).
  • the preparation agent includes from about 5 to about 100 mM of the one or more buffers.
  • the preparation agent includes from about 5 to about 50 mM (e.g., from about 5 mM to about 40 mM, from about 8 mM to about 30 mM, about 10 mM to about 25 mM) about of the one or more buffers.
  • the preparation agent includes about 10 mM, about 20 mM, about 25 mM, or about 30 mM of the one or more buffers.
  • the preparation agent includes one or more saccharides, such as monosaccharides and disaccharides, including sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, dextrose, and xylose.
  • the saccharide is a monosaccharide.
  • the saccharide is a disaccharide.
  • the saccharide is a monosaccharide, a disaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • the saccharide is a non-reducing disaccharide.
  • the saccharide is sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, or xylose.
  • the saccharide comprises trehalose.
  • the preparation agent comprises a starch.
  • the preparation agent includes poly sucrose, a polymer of sucrose and epichlorohydrin.
  • the preparation agent includes from about 10 mM to about 1,000 mM of the one or more saccharides.
  • the preparation agent includes from about 50 to about 500 mM of the one or more saccharides.
  • one or more saccharides is present in an amount of from 10 mM 10 to 500 mM.
  • one or more saccharides is present in an amount of from 50 mM to 200 mM.
  • one or more saccharides is present in an amount from 100 mM to 150 mM.
  • the one or more saccharides are the lyophilizing agent; for example, in some embodiments, the lyophilizing agent comprises trehalose, polysucrose, or a combination thereof.
  • the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives may comprise one or more of water or a saline solution.
  • the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives, such as freeze-dried platelets may comprise DMSO.
  • the preparation agent comprises an organic solvent, such as an alcohol (e.g., ethanol).
  • the amount of solvent can range from 0.1% to 5.0% (v/v).
  • the organic solvent can range from about 0.1% (v/v) to about 5.0% (v/v), such as from about 0.3% (v/v) to about 3.0% (v/v), or from about 0.5% (v/v) to about 2% (v/v).
  • suitable organic solvents include, but are not limited to alcohols, esters, ketones, ethers, halogenated solvents, hydrocarbons, nitriles, glycols, alkyl nitrates, water or mixtures thereof.
  • suitable organic solvents includes, but are not limited to methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, acetic acid, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, tetrahydrofuran, isopropyl ether (IPE), tert-butyl methyl ether, dioxane (e.g., 1,4-dioxane), acetonitrile, propionitrile, methylene chloride, chloroform, toluene, anisole, cyclohexane, hexane, heptane, ethylene glycol, nitromethane, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide, and combinations thereof.
  • IPE isopropyl ether
  • dioxane
  • the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof.
  • the organic solvent comprises ethanol, DMSO, or a combination thereof.
  • the presence of organic solvents, such as ethanol can be beneficial in the processing of platelets, platelet derivatives, or thrombosomes (e.g., freeze-dried platelet derivatives).
  • the preparation agent does not include an organic solvent. In some embodiments, the preparation agent comprises an organic solvent. In some embodiments the preparation agent comprises DMSO.
  • a preparation agent can have any appropriate pH.
  • a preparation agent can have a pH of about 6.0 to about 7.4 (e.g., about 6.5 to about 6.9, or about 6.6 to about 6.8).
  • one or more other components may be combined with in the platelets (e.g., as part of a preparation agent).
  • exemplary components may include Prostaglandin E1 or Prostacyclin and or EDTA/EGTA to prevent platelet aggregation and activation.
  • a preparation agent can be Buffer A, as shown in Example 1.
  • a preparation agent can comprise Buffer A, as shown in Example 1, wherein one or more components (e.g., ethanol) is present in an amount up to three times the amount shown in Example 1.
  • one or more components e.g., ethanol
  • preparation agent compositions that may be used are shown in Tables P1-P6.
  • Buffer B can be used when incubating platelets, e.g., for flow cytometry. Such an incubation can be done at room temperature in the dark. Albumin is an optional component of Buffer B. Buffer B Concentration (mM unless Component otherwise specified) Buffer and Salts Table P5 (below) BSA 0.35% Dextrose 5 pH 7.4
  • Table P5 shows the concentrations of HEPES and salts in Buffer B.
  • the pH can be adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH.
  • Albumin is an optional component of Buffer B.
  • Table P5 shows the concentrations of HEPES and salts in Buffer B.
  • the pH can be adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH.
  • Albumin is an optional component of Buffer B.
  • Table P6 is another exemplary preparation agent.
  • rehydrating the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives comprises adding to the platelets an aqueous liquid.
  • the aqueous liquid is water.
  • the aqueous liquid is an aqueous solution (e.g., a buffer).
  • the aqueous liquid is a saline solution.
  • the aqueous liquid is a suspension.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives have less than about 10%, such as less than about 8%, such as less than about 6%, such as less than about 4%, such as less than about 2%, such as less than about 0.5% crosslinking of platelet membranes via proteins and/or lipids present on the membranes.
  • the rehydrated platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • the platelets or pooled platelets may be acidified to a pH of about 6.0 to about 7.4 prior to TFF or being diluted with the preparation agent.
  • the method comprises acidifying the platelets to a pH of about 6.5 to about 6.9.
  • the method comprises acidifying the platelets to a pH of about 6.6 to about 6.8.
  • the acidifying comprises adding to the pooled platelets a solution comprising Acid Citrate Dextrose (ACD).
  • ACD Acid Citrate Dextrose
  • the platelets are isolated prior to the TFF or being diluted with the preparation agent.
  • the method further comprises isolating platelets by using centrifugation.
  • the centrifugation occurs at a relative centrifugal force (RCF) of about 1000 ⁇ g to about 2000 ⁇ g. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs at relative centrifugal force (RCF) of about 1300 ⁇ g to about 1800 ⁇ g. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs at relative centrifugal force (RCF) of about 1500 ⁇ g. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs for about 1 minute to about 60 minutes. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs for about 10 minutes to about 30 minutes. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs for about 30 minutes.
  • platelets are isolated, for example in a liquid medium, prior to treating a subject.
  • platelets are donor-derived platelets. In some embodiments, platelets are obtained by a process that comprises an apheresis step. In some embodiments, platelets are pooled platelets.
  • platelets are pooled from a plurality of donors. Such platelets pooled from a plurality of donors may be also referred herein to as pooled platelets.
  • the donors are more than 5, such as more than 10, such as more than 20, such as more than 50, such as up to about 100 donors.
  • the donors are from about 5 to about 100, such as from about 10 to about 50, such as from about 20 to about 40, such as from about 25 to about 35. Pooled platelets can be used to make any of the compositions described herein.
  • platelets are derived in vitro. In some embodiments, platelets are derived or prepared in a culture. In some embodiments, preparing the platelets comprises deriving or growing the platelets from a culture of megakaryocytes. In some embodiments, preparing the platelets comprises deriving or growing the platelets (or megakaryocytes) from a culture of human pluripotent stem cells (PSCs), including embryonic stem cells (ESCs) and/or induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs).
  • PSCs human pluripotent stem cells
  • ESCs embryonic stem cells
  • iPSCs induced pluripotent stem cells
  • platelets or platelet derivatives are prepared prior to treating a subject as described herein.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives are lyophilized.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives can be cryopreserved in plasma and DMSO (e.g., 3-9% DMSO (e.g., 6% DMSO)).
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives are cryopreserved as described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2020/0046771 A1, published on Feb. 13, 2020, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • platelets e.g., apheresis platelet, platelets isolated from whole blood, pooled platelets, or a combination thereof
  • a preparation agent comprising a liquid medium at a concentration from 10,000 platelets/ ⁇ L to 10,000,000 platelets/ ⁇ L, such as 50,000 platelets/ ⁇ L to 2,000,000 platelets/ ⁇ L, such as 100,000 platelets/ ⁇ L to 500,000 platelets/ ⁇ L, such as 150,000 platelets/ ⁇ L to 300,000 platelets/ ⁇ L, such as 200,000 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • the method further comprises drying the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • the drying step comprises lyophilizing the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • the drying step comprises freeze-drying the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • the method further comprises rehydrating the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) obtained from the drying step.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives are cold stored, cryopreserved, or lyophilized (e.g., to produce thrombosomes) prior to use in therapy or in functional assays.
  • any known technique for drying platelets can be used in accordance with the present disclosure, as long as the technique can achieve a final residual moisture content of less than 5%. Preferably, the technique achieves a final residual moisture content of less than 2%, such as 1%, 0.5%, or 0.1%.
  • suitable techniques are freeze-drying (lyophilization) and spray-drying.
  • a suitable lyophilization method is presented in Table LA. Additional exemplary lyophilization methods can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,811,558, 8,486,617, and 8,097,403.
  • An exemplary spray-drying method includes: combining nitrogen, as a drying gas, with a preparation agent according to the present disclosure, then introducing the mixture into GEA Mobile Minor spray dryer from GEA Processing Engineering, Inc. (Columbia MD, USA), which has a Two-Fluid Nozzle configuration, spray drying the mixture at an inlet temperature in the range of 150° C. to 190° C., an outlet temperature in the range of 65° C. to 100° C., an atomic rate in the range of 0.5 to 2.0 bars, an atomic rate in the range of 5 to 13 kg/hr, a nitrogen use in the range of 60 to 100 kg/hr, and a run time of 10 to 35 minutes.
  • the final step in spray drying is preferentially collecting the dried mixture.
  • the dried composition in some embodiments is stable for at least six months at temperatures that range from ⁇ 20° C. or lower to 90° C. or higher.
  • the step of drying the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) that are obtained as disclosed herein comprises incubating the platelet and/or platelet derivatives with a lyophilizing agent (e.g., a non-reducing disaccharide).
  • a lyophilizing agent e.g., a non-reducing disaccharide
  • the methods for preparing platelets and/or platelet derivatives further comprises incubating the platelets with a lyophilizing agent.
  • the lyophilizing agent is a saccharide.
  • the saccharide is a disaccharide, such as a non-reducing disaccharide.
  • the platelets and/or platelet derivatives are incubated with a lyophilizing agent for a sufficient amount of time and at a suitable temperature to incubate the platelets with the lyophilizing agent.
  • suitable lyophilizing agents are saccharides, such as monosaccharides and disaccharides, including sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, and xylose.
  • suitable lyophilizing agents include serum albumin, dextran, polyvinyl pyrrolidone (PVP), starch, and hydroxyethyl starch (HES).
  • exemplary lyophilizing agents can include a high molecular weight polymer.
  • high molecular weight it means a polymer having an average molecular weight of about or above 70 kDa and up to 1,000,000 kDa.
  • Non-limiting examples are polymers of sucrose and epichlorohydrin (e.g., polysucrose).
  • the lyophilizing agent is polysucrose.
  • any amount of high molecular weight polymer can be used as a lyophilizing agent, it is preferred that an amount be used that achieves a final concentration of about 3% to 10% (w/v), such as 3% to 7%, for example 6%.
  • An exemplary saccharide for use in the compositions disclosed herein is trehalose. Regardless of the identity of the saccharide, it can be present in the composition in any suitable amount. For example, it can be present in an amount of 1 mM to 1 M. In embodiments, it is present in an amount of from 10 mM 10 to 500 mM. In some embodiments, it is present in an amount of from 20 mM to 200 mM. In embodiments, it is present in an amount from 40 mM to 100 mM. In various embodiments, the saccharide is present in different specific concentrations within the ranges recited above, and one of skill in the art can immediately understand the various concentrations without the need to specifically recite each herein. Where more than one saccharide is present in the composition, each saccharide can be present in an amount according to the ranges and particular concentrations recited above.
  • preparation of thrombosomes further comprises one or more of the procedures described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,486,617 (such as, e.g., Examples 1-5) and U.S. Pat. No. 8,097,403 (such as, e.g., Examples 1-3), incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • a starting material e.g., one or more donor platelet units
  • a starting material can comprise one or more donor platelet units.
  • a starting material can comprise donor plasma.
  • the starting material may or may not be acidified with an anti-coagulation buffer (i.e. ACD-A) before centrifugation.
  • Plasma can be aspirated off of the platelet pellet after centrifugation.
  • Cell compatible buffer containing cryoprotectants e.g., a loading buffer, which can be similar to or the same as a preparation agent
  • a loading buffer which can be similar to or the same as a preparation agent
  • Platelets may or may not be diluted to a pre-determined concentration (e.g., 2200 k/ul to 2800 k/ul) with buffer if desired. Platelets in buffer may be incubated between 0 minutes and 240 minutes at an incubation temperature from 18° C. to 37° C.
  • a lyoprotectant bulking agent e.g., polysucrose
  • a lyoprotectant bulking agent can be added to the platelets in buffer to achieve a final bulking agent concentration from 1% to 10% w/v (with preference at 6% w/v).
  • the centrifuged processed platelets can then be filled into vials, lyophilized and thermally treated.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • have a particle size e.g., diameter, max dimension
  • 0.5 ⁇ m e.g., at least about at least about 0.6 ⁇ m, at least about 0.7 ⁇ m, at least about 0.8 ⁇ m, at least about 0.9 ⁇ m, at least about 1.0 ⁇ m, at least about 1.2 ⁇ m, at least about 1.5 ⁇ m, at least about 2.0 ⁇ m, at least about 2.5 ⁇ m, or at least about 5.0 ⁇ m).
  • the particle size is less than about 5.0 ⁇ m (e.g., less than about 2.5 ⁇ m, less than about 2.0 ⁇ m, less than about 1.5 ⁇ m, less than about 1.0 ⁇ m, less than about 0.9 ⁇ m, less than about 0.8 ⁇ m, less than about 0.7 ⁇ m, less than about 0.6 ⁇ m, less than about 0.5 ⁇ m, less than about 0.4 ⁇ m, or less than about 0.3 ⁇ m).
  • 5.0 ⁇ m e.g., less than about 2.5 ⁇ m, less than about 2.0 ⁇ m, less than about 1.5 ⁇ m, less than about 1.0 ⁇ m, less than about 0.9 ⁇ m, less than about 0.8 ⁇ m, less than about 0.7 ⁇ m, less than about 0.6 ⁇ m, less than about 0.5 ⁇ m, less than about 0.4 ⁇ m, or less than about 0.3 ⁇ m).
  • the particle size is from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 5.0 ⁇ m (e.g., from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 4.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 2.5 ⁇ m, from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 2.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.7 ⁇ m to about 1.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 0.9 ⁇ m, or from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 0.8 ⁇ m).
  • 5.0 ⁇ m e.g., from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 4.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 2.5 ⁇ m, from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 2.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.7 ⁇ m to about 1.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 0.9 ⁇ m, or from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • At least 50% e.g., at least about 55%, at least about 60%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, at least about 80%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%, at least about 95%, or at least about 99%
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • At most 99% e.g., at most about 95%, at most about 80%, at most about 75%, at most about 70%, at most about 65%, at most about 60%, at most about 55%, or at most about 50%
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives are in the range of about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 5.0 ⁇ m (e.g., from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 4.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 2.5 ⁇ m, from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 2.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.7 ⁇ m to about 1.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 0.9 ⁇ m, or from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 0.8 ⁇ m).
  • about 50% to about 99% (e.g., about 55% to about 95%, about 60% to about 90%, about 65% to about 85, about 70% to about 80%) of the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) are in the range of about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 5.0 ⁇ m (e.g., from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 4.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 2.5 ⁇ m, from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 2.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.7 ⁇ m to about 1.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 0.9 ⁇ m, or from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 0.8 ⁇ m).
  • 0.5 ⁇ m to about 5.0 ⁇ m e.g., from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 4.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.5 ⁇ m to about 2.5 ⁇ m, from about 0.6 ⁇ m to about 2.0 ⁇ m, from about 0.7 ⁇ m to about 1.0 ⁇ m, from about
  • a microparticle can be a particle having a particle size (e.g., diameter, max dimension) of less than about 0.5 ⁇ m (less than about 0.45 ⁇ m or 0.4 ⁇ m) In some cases, a microparticle can be a particle having a particle size of about 0.01 ⁇ m to about 0.5 ⁇ m (e.g., about 0.02 ⁇ m to about 0.5 ⁇ m).
  • a particle size e.g., diameter, max dimension
  • a microparticle can be a particle having a particle size of about 0.01 ⁇ m to about 0.5 ⁇ m (e.g., about 0.02 ⁇ m to about 0.5 ⁇ m).
  • Compositions comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared according to methods described herein, can have a microparticle content that contributes to less than about 5.0% (e.g., less than about 4.5%, 4.0%, 3.5%, 3.0%, 2.5%, 2.0%, 1.5%, 1.0%, or 0.5%) of the total scattering intensity of all particles from about 1 nm to about 60,000 nm in radius in the composition.
  • a content of microparticles “by scattering intensity” refers to the microparticle content based on the scattering intensity of all particles from about 1 nm to about 60,000 nm in radius in the composition.
  • the microparticle content can be measured by any appropriate method, for example, by dynamic light scattering (DLS).
  • DLS dynamic light scattering
  • the viscosity of a sample used for DLS can be at about 1.060 cP (or adjusted to be so), as this is the approximate viscosity of plasma.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives can have cell surface markers.
  • the presence of cell surface markers can be determined using any appropriate method.
  • the presence of cell surface markers can be determined using binding proteins (e.g., antibodies) specific for one or more cell surface markers and flow cytometry (e.g., as a percent positivity, e.g., using approximately 2.7 ⁇ 10 5 thrombosomes/ ⁇ L; and about 4.8 ⁇ L of an anti-CD41 antibody, about 3.3 ⁇ L of an anti-CD42 antibody, about 1.3 ⁇ L of annexin V, or about 2.4 ⁇ L of an anti-CD62 antibody).
  • binding proteins e.g., antibodies
  • flow cytometry e.g., as a percent positivity, e.g., using approximately 2.7 ⁇ 10 5 thrombosomes/ ⁇ L; and about 4.8 ⁇ L of an anti-CD41 antibody, about 3.3 ⁇ L of an anti-CD42 antibody, about 1.3 ⁇ L of annexin V, or about 2.4
  • Non-limiting examples of cell-surface markers include CD41 (also called glycoprotein IIb or GPIIb, which can be assayed using e.g., an anti-CD41 antibody), CD42 (which can be assayed using, e.g., an anti-CD42 antibody), CD62 (also called CD62P or P-selectin, which can be assayed using, e.g., an anti-CD62 antibody), phosphatidylserine (which can be assayed using, e.g., annexin V (AV)), and CD47 (which is used in self-recognition; absence of this marker, in some cases, can lead to phagocytosis).
  • CD41 also called glycoprotein IIb or GPIIb
  • CD42 which can be assayed using, e.g., an anti-CD42 antibody
  • CD62 also called CD62P or P-selectin, which can be assayed using, e.g., an anti-CD62
  • the percent positivity of any cell surface marker can be any appropriate percent positivity.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • the percent positivity of any cell surface marker can be any appropriate percent positivity.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • can have an average CD41 percent positivity of at least 55% e.g., at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 67%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95%).
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • platelets or platelet derivatives can have an average CD42 percent positivity of at least 65% (e.g., at least 67%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95%).
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • platelets or platelet derivatives can have an average CD62 percent positivity of at least 10% (e.g., at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 30%, at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 82%, at least 83%, at least 84%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95%).
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • platelets or platelet derivatives can have an average annexin V positivity of at least 25% (e.g., at least 30%, at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, or at least 99%).
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • platelets or platelet derivatives can have an average CD47 percent positivity of at least about 8% (e.g., at least about 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, or 55%).
  • Glycoprotein VI is a platelet receptor for collagen, and the binding of collagen to GVPI activates the platelet. Receptor binding can be noticeably reduced in thrombosomes compared to fresh platelets. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that the manufacturing process is blocking or destroying some copies of this receptor in thrombosomes, possibly to a reduction in collagen binding in thrombosomes relative to fresh platelets.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives as described herein can have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane. Aggregation of activated platelets is mediated by the formation of the GPIIb/IIIa complex, which can bind to fibrinogen (also called Factor 1) and form a clot.
  • GPIIb/IIIa is a platelet fibrinogen receptor also known as CD41/CD61 complex.
  • the GPIIb/IIIa clone PAC-1 binds to the active form of the GPIIb/IIIa.
  • fibrinogen on the cell membrane may be indicative of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) capable of forming clots.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • a lack of binding by anti-PAC1 antibodies to the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared by methods described herein can be indicative of fibrinogen bound to the active form of GPIIb/GPIIIa, as PAC-1 binds to the same complex.
  • platelets or platelets derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) can have a greater amount of bound fibrinogen when they retain a higher amount of residual plasma.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives can be capable of generating thrombin, for example, when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • thrombosomes e.g., at a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L
  • TPH thrombin peak height
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L can generate a TPH of about 25 nM to about 100 nM (e.g., about 25 nM to about 50 nM, about 25 to about 75 nM, about 50 to about 100 nM, about 75 to about 100 nM, about 35 nM to about 95 nM, about 45 to about 85 nM, about 55 to about 75 nM, or about 60 to about 70 nM) when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and (e.g., at 0.25 pM, 0.5 pM, 1 pM, 2 pM, 5 pM or 10 pM) and optionally phospholipids.
  • tissue factor e.g., at 0.25 pM, 0.5 pM, 1 pM, 2 pM, 5 pM or 10 pM
  • optionally phospholipids e.g.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., at a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L) as described herein can generate a TPH of at least 25 nM (e.g., at least 30 nM, 35 nM, 40 nM, 45 nM, 50 nM, 52 nM, 54 nM, 55 nM, 56 nM, 58 nM, 60 nM, 65 nM, 70 nM, 75 nM, or 80 nM) when in the presence of PRP Reagent (cat #TS30.00 from Thrombinoscope), for example, using conditions comprising 20 ⁇ L of PRP Reagent and 80 ⁇ L of a composition comprising about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • PRP Reagent catalog #TS30.00 from Thrombinoscope
  • platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., at a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L) as described herein can generate a TPH of about 25 nM to about 100 nM (e.g., about 25 nM to about 50 nM, about 25 to about 75 nM, about 50 to about 100 nM, about 75 to about 100 nM, about 35 nM to about 95 nM, about 45 to about 85 nM, about 55 to about 75 nM, or about 60 to about 70 nM) when in the presence of PRP Reagent (cat #TS30.00 from Thrombinoscope), for example, using conditions comprising 20 ⁇ L of PRP Reagent and 80 ⁇ L of a composition comprising about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • PRP Reagent catalog #TS30.00 from Thrombinoscope
  • Platelets or Platelet derivatives as described herein can be capable of generating thrombin, for example, when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes
  • TGPU thrombin generation potency units
  • platelets or platelet derivatives can have a potency of between 1.2 and 2.5 TPGU per 10 6 particles (e.g., between 1.2 and 2.0, between 1.3 and 1.5, between 1.5 and 2.25, between 1.5 and 2.0, between 1.5 and 1.75, between 1.75 and 2.5, between 2.0 and 2.5, or between 2.25 and 2.5 TPGU per 10 6 particles).
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives can be capable of aggregating, as determined, for example, by using a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS®).
  • T-TAS® total thrombus-formation analysis system
  • platelets or platelet derivatives as described herein when at a concentration of at least 70 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L (e.g., at least 73 ⁇ 10 3 , 100 ⁇ 10 3 , 150 ⁇ 10 3 , 173 ⁇ 10 3 , 200 ⁇ 10 3 , 250 ⁇ 10 3 , or 255 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L) can result in a T-TAS occlusion time (e.g., time to reach kPa of 80) of less than 14 minutes (e.g., less than 13.5, 13, 12.5, 12, 11.5, or 11 minutes), for example, in platelet-reduced citrated whole blood.
  • T-TAS occlusion time e.g., time to reach kPa of 80
  • platelets or platelet derivatives as described herein when at a concentration of at least 70 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L (e.g., at least 73 ⁇ 10 3 , 100 ⁇ 10 3 , 150 ⁇ 10 3 , 173 ⁇ 10 3 , 200 ⁇ 10 3 , 250 ⁇ 10 3 , or 255 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L) can result in an area under the curve (AUC) of at least 1300 (e.g., at least 1380, 1400, 1500, 1600, or 1700), for example, in platelet-reduced citrated whole blood.
  • AUC area under the curve
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives as described herein can be capable of aggregating, for example, in the presence of an aggregation agonist.
  • aggregation agonists include thrombin and collagen.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can have a percent aggregation of at least 5% (e.g., at least 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 67%, 70%, 75%, 85%, 90%, or 99%) in the presence of an aggregation agonist.
  • platelets or platelet derivatives as described herein can have a percent aggregation of about 25% to about 100% (e.g., about 25% to about 50%, about 25% to about 75%, about 50% to about 100%, about 75% to about 100%, about 40% to about 95%, about 55% to about 80%, or about 65% to about 75%) in the presence of an aggregation agonist.
  • Percent aggregation can be determined by any appropriate method, for example, light transmission aggregometry.
  • Compositions comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can have appropriate conditions and amounts of cellular substrates and/or metabolites, such as pH, pCO 2 , pO 2 , HCO 3 concentration, total carbon dioxide (TCO 2 ), sO 2 , and lactate concentration.
  • Lactate can be the products of glycolysis.
  • a starting material can have high lactate concentration because it has been stored ex vivo, respirating and performing glycolysis, for a period of time (e.g., about 3 days) by the time of manufacturing.
  • the pH can be about 6.0 to about 7.5 (e.g., about 6.0 to about 7.4, about 6.9 to about 7.5, or about 7.0 to about 7.3).
  • the pCO 2 can be about 10 to about 20 mmHg (e.g., about 10 to about 15 mmHg, about 15 to about 20 mmHg, or about 17 to about 19 mmHg).
  • the pO 2 can be about 140 to about 165 mmHg (e.g., about 140 to about 150 mmHg, about 150 to about 160 mmgH, or about 160 to about 165 mmHg).
  • the HCO 3 concentration can be about 4.5 to about 6.5 mmol/L (e.g., about 5.0 to about 6.0 mmol/L).
  • the total carbon dioxide can be about 4 to about 8 mmol/L (e.g., about 5 to about 7 mmol/L).
  • the sO 2 can be at least about 98% (e.g., at least about 99%).
  • the lactate concentration can be less than about 2.0 mmol/L (e.g., less than 1.5 mmol/L or 1.0 mmol/L).
  • the lactate concentration can be about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L (e.g., about 0.5 to about 0.6 mmol/L, about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L, or about 0.8 to about 1.3 mmol/L).
  • Platelet or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes as described herein can retain some metabolic activity, for example, as evidenced by lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) activity.
  • LDH lactate dehydrogenase
  • platelets or platelet derivatives e.g., thrombosomes as described herein can retain at least about 10% (e.g., at least about 12%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, or 45%) of the LDH activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • metabolic activity can be evidenced by retained esterase activity, such as the ability of the cells to cleave the acetate groups on carboxyfluorescein diacetate succinimidyl ester (CFDASE) to unmask a fluorophore.
  • retained esterase activity such as the ability of the cells to cleave the acetate groups on carboxyfluorescein diacetate succinimidyl ester (CFDASE) to unmask a fluorophore.
  • pathogen reduction is generally desirable in blood products. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that some methods of pathogen reduction can cause the formation of microparticles in the treated blood product.
  • One method of pathogen reduction involves the use of a photosensitive nucleic acid-intercalating compound to alter the nucleic acids of pathogens upon illumination with an appropriate wavelength.
  • the INTERCEPT® system (made by Cerus) uses amotosalen, a nucleic acid intercalating compound that forms cross-links in nucleic acid upon illumination with UVA.
  • a final blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) as described herein can be prepared by any appropriate method.
  • a final blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) as described herein can be prepared by a method as disclosed herein.
  • a final blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • a final blood product can be the result of freeze-drying a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium, as described herein.
  • a final blood product can be prepared using tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone filtration)).
  • a starting material e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)
  • a partially processed blood product e.g., a blood product that has undergone filtration
  • a final blood product can be prepared using centrifugation of a starting material (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone filtration)).
  • a starting material e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)
  • a partially processed blood product e.g., a blood product that has undergone filtration
  • a starting material can be any appropriate starting material.
  • a starting material can have a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/mL.
  • a protein concentration can be based on the protein concentration in the plasma of whole blood.
  • a protein concentration can be based on the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • a starting material can be donor blood product (e.g., whole blood or fractionated blood).
  • the starting material can be pooled donor blood product (e.g., pooled whole blood or pooled fractionated blood).
  • a starting material can include donor apheresis plasma.
  • a starting material can be derived from donor apheresis plasma.
  • donor apheresis plasma can refer to the plasma component of apheresis material, whether or not the material contains platelets or other blood cells.
  • a starting material can be donor apheresis material (e.g., donor platelets or a pool of donor platelets).
  • a starting material is positive for one or more of: HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency-approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • starting material can test positive for HLA Class I antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • a starting material can test positive for HLA Class II antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • starting material can test positive for HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay).
  • a regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be the LABSCREENTM Mixed by One Lambda.
  • a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSIONTM software.
  • a starting material can undergo a pathogen reduction step, for example, a nucleic acid intercalating compound that forms cross-links in nucleic acid upon illumination with UVA.
  • a pathogen reduction step for example, a nucleic acid intercalating compound that forms cross-links in nucleic acid upon illumination with UVA.
  • a starting material e.g., one or more units of donor platelets
  • the starting material may or may not be initially diluted with an acidified washing buffer (e.g., a control buffer).
  • an acidified washing buffer e.g., a control buffer
  • washing with an acidified washing buffer can reduce platelet activation during processing.
  • a starting material can undergo two general processing pathways; either washed with control buffer (e.g.
  • TFF processed material can then be filled into vials, lyophilized and thermally treated.
  • the method can include an initial dilution step, for example, a starting material (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)) can be diluted with a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein) to form a diluted starting material.
  • a preparation agent e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein
  • the initial dilution step can include dilution with a preparation agent with a mass of preparation agent equal to at least about 10% of the mass of the starting material (e.g., at least about 15%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, or 200% of the mass of the starting material.
  • an initial dilution step can be carried out using the TFF apparatus.
  • the method can include concentrating (e.g., concentrating platelets) (e.g., concentrating a starting material or a diluted starting material) to form a concentrated platelet composition.
  • concentrated can include concentrating to a about 1000 ⁇ 10 3 to about 4000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L (e.g., about 1000 ⁇ 10 3 to about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 , about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 to about 3000 ⁇ 10 3 , or about 4000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L).
  • a concentration step can be carried out using the TFF apparatus.
  • the concentration of platelets or platelet derivatives can be determined by any appropriate method.
  • a counter can be used to quantitate concentration of blood cells in suspension using impedance (e.g., a Beckman Coulter AcT 10 or an AcT diff 2).
  • TFF can include diafiltering (sometimes called “washing”) of a starting material, a diluted starting material, a concentrated platelet composition, or a combination thereof.
  • diafiltering can include washing with at least 2 (e.g., at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more) diavolumes.
  • TFF can include buffer exchange.
  • a buffer can be used in TFF.
  • a buffer can be any appropriate buffer.
  • the buffer can be a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein).
  • the buffer can be the same preparation agent as was used for dilution.
  • a buffer can include a lyophilizing agent, including a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof.
  • a buffering agent can be any appropriate buffering agent.
  • a buffering agent can be HEPES ((4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • a base can be any appropriate base. In some embodiments, a base can be sodium bicarbonate.
  • a saccharide can be a monosaccharide.
  • a loading agent can be a saccharide. In some embodiments, a saccharide can include sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, or xylose. In some embodiments, a monosaccharide can be trehalose. In some embodiments, the loading agent can include polysucrose.
  • a salt can be any appropriate salt. In some embodiments, a salt can be selected from the group consisting of sodium chloride (NaCl), potassium chloride (KCl), or a combination thereof.
  • a membrane with a pore size of about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 1 ⁇ m can be used in TFF.
  • a membrane can be made from any appropriate material.
  • a membrane can be a hydrophilic membrane.
  • a membrane can be a hydrophobic membrane.
  • a membrane with a nominal molecular weight cutoff (NMWCO) of at least about 100 kDa can be used in TFF.
  • TFF can be performed at any appropriate temperature.
  • TFF can be performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C. (e.g., about 20° C. to about 25° C., about 20° C. to about 30° C., about 25° C. to about 30° C., about 30° C. to about 35° C., about 30° C. to about 37° C., about 25° C. to about 35° C., or about 25° C.
  • TFF can be carried out at a flow rate (e.g., a circulating flow rate) of about 100 ml/min to about 800 ml/min (e.g., about 100 to about 200 ml/min, about 100 to about 400 ml/min, about 100 to about 600 ml/min, about 200 to about 400 ml/min, about 200 to about 600 ml/min, about 200 to about 800 ml/min, about 400 to about 600 ml/min, about 400 to about 800 ml/min, about 600 to about 800 ml/min, about 100 ml/min, about 200 ml/min, about 300 ml/min, about 400 ml/min, about 500 ml/min, about 600 ml/min, about 700 ml/min, or about 800 ml/min).
  • a flow rate e.g., a circulating flow rate
  • TFF can be performed until a particular endpoint is reached, forming a TFF-treated composition.
  • An endpoint can be any appropriate endpoint.
  • an endpoint can be a percentage of residual plasma (e.g., less than or equal to about 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1% of residual plasma).
  • an endpoint can be a relative absorbance at 280 nm (A280).
  • an endpoint can be an A280 (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm) that is less than or equal to about 50% (e.g., less than or equal to about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the A280 (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm) prior to TFF (e.g., of a starting material or of a diluted starting material).
  • an instrument to measure A280 can be configured as follows: a 0.5 cm gap flow cell can be attached to the filtrate line of the TFF system.
  • the flow cell can be connected to a photometer with fiber optics cables attached to each side of the flow cell (light source cable and light detector cable).
  • the flow cell can be made with a silica glass lens on each side of the fiber optic cables.
  • an endpoint can be an absolute A280 (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm).
  • an endpoint can be an A280 that is less than or equal to 1.70 AU (e.g., less than or equal to 1.66, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, 1.3, 1.2, 1.1, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 AU) (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm).
  • a percentage of residual plasma, a relative A280, or an A280 can be determined based on the aqueous medium of a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • a percentage of residual plasma can be determined based on a known correlation to an A280.
  • an endpoint can be a platelet concentration, as TFF can include concentration or dilution of a sample (e.g., using a preparation agent).
  • an endpoint can be a platelet concentration of at least about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L (e.g., at least about 2050 ⁇ 10 3 , 2100 ⁇ 10 3 , 2150 ⁇ 10 3 , 2200 ⁇ 10 3 , 2250 ⁇ 10 3 , 2300 ⁇ 10 3 , 2350 ⁇ 10 3 , 2400 ⁇ 10 3 , 2450 ⁇ 10 3 , or 2500 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L).
  • an endpoint can be a platelet concentration of about 1000 ⁇ 10 3 to about 2500 platelets/ ⁇ L (e.g., about 1000 ⁇ 10 3 to about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 , about 1500 ⁇ 10 3 to about 2300 ⁇ 10 3 , or about 1700 ⁇ 10 3 to about 2300 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L)
  • an endpoint can include more than one criterion (e.g., a percentage of residual plasma and a platelet concentration, a relative A280 and a platelet concentration, or an absolute A280 and a platelet concentration).
  • a TFF-treated composition is subsequently lyophilized, optionally with a thermal treatment step, to form a final blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)).
  • a final blood product e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a TFF-treated composition can be considered to be a final blood product.
  • a blood product can be prepared using centrifugation of a blood product (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone TFF)).
  • a blood product can be prepared without centrifugation of a blood product (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone TFF)). Centrifugation can include any appropriate steps.
  • centrifugation can include a slow acceleration, a slow deceleration, or a combination thereof.
  • centrifugation can include centrifugation at about 1400 ⁇ g to about 1550 ⁇ g (e.g., about 1400 to about 1450 ⁇ g, about 1450 to about 1500 ⁇ g, or 1500 to about 1550 ⁇ g, about 1400 ⁇ g, about 1410 ⁇ g, about 1430 ⁇ g, about 1450 ⁇ g, about 1470 ⁇ g, about 1490 ⁇ g, about 1500 ⁇ g, about 1510 ⁇ g, about 1530 ⁇ g, or about 1550 ⁇ g).
  • the duration of centrifugation can be about 10 min to about 30 min (e.g., about 10 to about 20 min, about 20 to about 30 min, about 10 min, about 20 min, or about 30 min).
  • a final blood product can be prepared using both TFF and centrifugation (e.g., TFF followed by centrifugation or centrifugation followed by TFF).
  • compositions prepared by any of the methods described herein are compositions prepared by any of the methods described herein.
  • a composition as described herein can be analyzed at multiple points during processing.
  • a starting material e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)
  • antibody content e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content
  • a starting material e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)
  • protein concentration e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm)).
  • a composition in an intermediate step of processing e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of an unprocessed blood product
  • antibody content e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content
  • the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of the starting material.
  • a final blood product e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • antibody content e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content
  • a final blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a final blood product e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a final blood product e.g., can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of the starting material.
  • a final blood product can have no detectable level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies.
  • the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • a composition as described herein can be analyzed at multiple points during processing.
  • donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed for antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content).
  • donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed for protein concentration (e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm).
  • a composition in an intermediate step of processing e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of an unprocessed blood product
  • antibody content e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content
  • the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of donor apheresis plasma.
  • a final blood product e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • antibody content e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content
  • a final blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a final blood product e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a final blood product e.g., can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of donor apheresis plasma.
  • a final blood product can have no detectable level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies.
  • the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • the protein concentration of a blood product can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • the protein concentration of a blood product can be measured using absorbance at 280 nm.
  • the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a blood product can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • a FLOWPRATM Screening or a LAB Screen Multi test kits from One Lambda, Thermo Fisher Scientific can be used as a method of HLA detection.
  • Raw materials can be tested prior to the TFF or centrifugation processes to determine a baseline level of class I and II antibodies for Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA) and Human Neutrophil Antigens (HNA). Testing can be repeated after processing by centrifugation or TFF to measure the removal of HLA and HNA. Additional testing points can be performed throughout the TFF procedure to maintain in-process control. Post-lyophilization and annealing, random samples can be selected from a batch and qualitative HLA/HNA antibody testing can be performed to ensure reduction and compliance with current FDA testing and acceptance requirements.
  • HLA Human Leukocyte Antigen
  • HNA Human Neutrophil Antigens
  • the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of two blood products can be compared by determining the percentage of beads positive for a marker (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads bound to HLA or HNA antibodies, respectively). Any appropriate comparative method can be used.
  • the antibody content of two blood products can be compared using a method as described herein. In some embodiments, such a method can be carried out as follows. An aliquot of plasma (e.g., about 1 mL) platelet-poor plasma can be obtained.
  • an aliquot of filtered (e.g., using a 0.2 ⁇ m filter) platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (e.g., about 1 mL) can be obtained.
  • PPP platelet-poor plasma
  • Beads coated with Class I HLA and/or beads coated with Class II HLA can be added to the plasma (e.g., about 5 ⁇ L of each type of bead to about 20 ⁇ L of PPP) to form a mixture of PPP and beads.
  • the mixture of PPP and beads can be vortexed.
  • the mixture of PPP and beads can be incubated to form an incubated mixture. Any appropriate incubation conditions can be used.
  • incubation can occur for a time (e.g., for about 30 minutes) at a temperature (e.g., at room temperature) with other conditions (e.g., in the dark) to form an incubated mixture.
  • incubation can include agitation (e.g., gentle rocking).
  • the beads in the incubated mixture can be washed using any appropriate conditions.
  • the beads in the incubated mixture can be washed with a wash buffer. Washed beads can be separated from the incubated mixture by any appropriate method.
  • the washed beads can be separated by centrifugation (e.g., at 9,000 ⁇ g for 2 minutes) to obtain pelleted beads.
  • the washing step can be repeated.
  • the beads can be resuspended to form a bead solution.
  • An antibody e.g., an antibody that will bind to the assayed antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content)
  • a detectable moiety can be added to the bead solution (e.g., an ⁇ IgG conjugated to a fluorescent reporter, such as FITC).
  • the antibody can be incubated with the bead solution under any appropriate conditions.
  • the antibody can be incubated for a time (e.g., for about 30 minutes) at a temperature (e.g., at room temperature) with other conditions (e.g., in the dark) to form labeled beads.
  • Labeled beads can be washed to remove unbound antibody conjugated to a detectable moiety.
  • the labeled beads can be washed using any appropriate conditions.
  • the labeled beads can be washed with a wash buffer. Washed labeled beads can be separated by any appropriate method.
  • the washed labeled beads can be separated by centrifugation (e.g., at 9,000 g for 2 minutes) to obtain pelleted labeled beads.
  • the washing step can be repeated.
  • Labeled beads can be detected by any appropriate method.
  • labeled beads can be detected by flow cytometry.
  • detection can include measurement of the percentage of beads that are positive for the detectable moiety as compared to a negative control.
  • a negative control can be prepared as above, using a PPP sample that is known to be negative for antibodies (e.g. HLA Class I, HLA Class II, or HNA antibodies).
  • a blood product e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a starting material e.g., donor apheresis material
  • a starting material can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads).
  • a starting material e.g., donor apheresis material
  • protein concentration e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm.
  • a blood product in an intermediate step of processing e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material
  • protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less
  • positive beads e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads
  • a blood product in an intermediate step of processing e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material
  • protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less
  • positive beads e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from a starting material.
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads.
  • 75% e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less
  • a final blood product e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a final blood product e.g., can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads).
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from a starting material.
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads.
  • the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • a blood product e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads).
  • donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed for protein concentration (e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm).
  • a blood product in an intermediate step of processing e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material
  • protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less
  • positive beads e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads
  • a blood product in an intermediate step of processing e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material
  • protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less
  • positive beads e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from donor apheresis plasma.
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads.
  • 75% e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less
  • a final blood product e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • a final blood product e.g., can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads).
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from donor apheresis material.
  • the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads.
  • the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • a percentage of positive beads can be determined using any appropriate method.
  • positive beads can be determined compared to a negative control sample.
  • a negative control sample can be any appropriate negative control sample.
  • a negative control sample can be used to determine positivity gating such that less than a certain percentage (e.g., between about 0.01% and about 1% (e.g., about 0.01% to about 0.05%, about 0.05% to about 0.1%, about 0.1% to about 0.5%, about 0.5% to about 1%, about 0.01%, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, about 0.5%, or about 1%)) of the negative control sample is present within the positivity gate.
  • a negative control sample can be a buffer (e.g., PBS).
  • a negative control sample can be a synthetic plasma composition.
  • a negative control sample can be a blood product known to be negative for the assayed antibodies (e.g., HLA or HNA antibodies).
  • Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by tangential flow filtration.
  • a method of reducing the amount of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets the method comprising filtering the composition by tangential flow filtration.
  • Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of beads positive for an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by tangential flow filtration.
  • an antibody e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody
  • a composition e.g., a blood product
  • the method comprising filtering the composition by tangential flow filtration.
  • Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by centrifugation. Also provided herein is a method of reducing the amount of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by centrifugation.
  • a HLA antibody e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody
  • a HNA antibody e.g., a HNA antibody
  • Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of beads positive for an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by centrifugation.
  • an antibody e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody
  • a composition e.g., a blood product
  • the method comprising filtering the composition by centrifugation.
  • the amount of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition can be reduced to below a reference level.
  • a reference level can be any appropriate reference level.
  • the percentage of beads positive an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) can be reduced as compared to the blood product before undergoing the methods described herein.
  • a percentage of beads positive for an antibody can be reduced by any appropriate amount.
  • a percentage of beads positive for an antibody can be reduced by at least 5% (e.g., reduced by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more) compared to the blood product before undergoing any of the methods described herein.
  • a composition as described herein can undergo any appropriate additional processing steps.
  • a composition as described herein can be freeze-dried.
  • freeze-dried platelets can be thermally treated (e.g., at about 80° C. for about 24 hours).
  • a composition can be cryopreserved or freeze-dried.
  • a first composition e.g., a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium as described herein
  • a mixture can be treated with a mixture.
  • a mixture can include a lyophilizing agent, including a base, a loading agent, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof, to form a second composition comprising platelets.
  • a loading agent can be a saccharide.
  • a saccharide can be a monosaccharide.
  • a saccharide can be sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, or xylose.
  • the loading agent can be polysucrose.
  • a first composition or a second composition can be dried.
  • a first composition or a second composition can be dried with a cryoprotectant.
  • a cryoprotectant can include a saccharide, optionally a base, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof to form a third composition.
  • a cryoprotectant can be polysucrose.
  • a first composition or a second composition can be freeze-dried.
  • a first composition or a second composition can be freeze-dried with a cryoprotectant.
  • a cryoprotectant can include a saccharide, optionally a base, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof to form a fourth composition.
  • organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol,
  • freeze-drying can occur at a temperature of about ⁇ 40° C. to about 5° C. In some embodiments, freeze-drying can occur over a gradient (e.g., about ⁇ 40° C. to about 5° C.). In some embodiments, a secondary drying step can be carried out (e.g., at about 20° C. to about 40° C.).
  • blood products e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • blood products e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • a lyophilizing agent can be the last step prior to drying.
  • the lyophilizing agent can be added at the same time or before other components of the composition, such as a salt, a buffer, optionally a cryoprotectant, or other components.
  • the lyophilizing agent is added to a preparation agent, thoroughly mixed to form a drying solution, dispensed into a drying vessel (e.g., a glass or plastic serum vial, a lyophilization bag), and subjected to conditions that allow for drying of a TFF-treated composition to form a dried composition.
  • a drying vessel e.g., a glass or plastic serum vial, a lyophilization bag
  • the lyophilization bag is a gas-permeable bag configured to allow gases to pass through at least a portion or all portions of the bag during the processing.
  • the gas-permeable bag can allow for the exchange of gas within the interior of the bag with atmospheric gas present in the surrounding environment.
  • the gas-permeable bag can be permeable to gases, such as oxygen, nitrogen, water, air, hydrogen, and carbon dioxide, allowing gas exchange to occur in the compositions provided herein.
  • the gas-permeable bag allows for the removal of some of the carbon dioxide present within an interior of the bag by allowing the carbon dioxide to permeate through its wall.
  • the release of carbon dioxide from the bag can be advantageous to maintaining a desired pH level of the composition contained within the bag.
  • the container of the process herein is a gas-permeable container that is closed or sealed.
  • the container is a container that is closed or sealed and a portion of which is gas-permeable.
  • the surface area of a gas-permeable portion of a closed or sealed container (e.g., bag) relative to the volume of the product being contained in the container (hereinafter referred to as the “SA/V ratio”) can be adjusted to improve pH maintenance of the compositions provided herein.
  • the SA/V ratio of the container can be at least about 2.0 cm 2 /mL (e.g., at least about 2.1 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.2 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.3 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.4 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.5 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.6 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.7 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.8 cm 2 /mL, at least about 2.9 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.0 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.1 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.2 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.3 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.4 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.5 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.6 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.7 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.8 cm 2 /mL, at least about 3.9 cm
  • the SA/V ratio of the container can be at most about 10.0 cm 2 /mL (e.g., at most about 9.9 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.8 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.7 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.6 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.5 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.4 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.3 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.2 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.1 cm 2 /mL, at most about 9.0 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.9 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.8 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.7 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.6, cm 2 /mL at most about 8.5 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.4 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.3 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.2 cm 2 /mL, at most about 8.1 cm 2 /mL,
  • the SA/V ratio of the container can range from about 2.0 to about 10.0 cm 2 /mL (e.g., from about 2.1 cm 2 /mL to about 9.9 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.2 cm 2 /mL to about 9.8 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.3 cm 2 /mL to about 9.7 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.4 cm 2 /mL to about 9.6 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.5 cm 2 /mL to about 9.5 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.6 cm 2 /mL to about 9.4 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.7 cm 2 /mL to about 9.3 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.8 cm 2 /mL to about 9.2 cm 2 /mL, from about 2.9 cm 2 /mL to about 9.1 cm 2 /mL, from about 3.0 cm 2 /mL to about 9.0 cm 2 /mL, from about 3.1 cm 2 /mL to about
  • Gas-permeable closed containers e.g., bags or portions thereof can be made of one or more various gas-permeable materials.
  • the gas-permeable bag can be made of one or more polymers including fluoropolymers (such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) polymers), polyolefins (such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), high-density polyethylene (HDPE)), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), polystyrene, polyvinylchloride (PVC), silicone, and any combinations thereof.
  • fluoropolymers such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) polymers
  • polyolefins such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), high-density polyethylene (HDPE)
  • FEP fluorinated ethylene propylene
  • PVC polyvinylchloride
  • silicone silicone
  • dried platelets or platelet derivatives can undergo heat treatment. Heating can be performed at a temperature above about 25° C. (e.g., greater than about 40° C., 50° C., 60° C., 70° C., 80° C. or higher). In some embodiments, heating is conducted between about 70° C. and about 85° C. (e.g., between about 75° C. and about 85° C., or at about 75° C. or 80° C.). The temperature for heating can be selected in conjunction with the length of time that heating is to be performed. Although any suitable time can be used, typically, the lyophilized platelets are heated for at least 1 hour, but not more than 36 hours.
  • heating is performed for at least 2 hours, at least 6 hours, at least 12 hours, at least 18 hours, at least 20 hours, at least 24 hours, or at least 30 hours.
  • the lyophilized platelets can be heated for 18 hours, 19 hours, 20 hours, 21 hours, 22 hours, 23 hours, 24 hours, 25 hours, 26 hours, 27 hours, 28 hours, 29 hours, or 30 hours.
  • Non-limiting exemplary combinations include: heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for at least 30 minutes at a temperature higher than 30° C.; heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for at least 10 hours at a temperature higher than 50° C.; heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for at least 18 hours at a temperature higher than 75° C.; and heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for 24 hours at 80° C.
  • heating can be performed in sealed container, such as a capped vial.
  • a sealed container be subjected to a vacuum prior to heating.
  • the heat treatment step particularly in the presence of a cryoprotectant such as albumin or polysucrose, has been found to improve the stability and shelf-life of the freeze-dried platelets. Indeed, advantageous results have been obtained with the particular combination of serum albumin or polysucrose and a post-lyophilization heat treatment step, as compared to those cryoprotectants without a heat treatment step.
  • a cryoprotectant e.g., sucrose
  • can be present in any appropriate amount e.g. about 3% to about 10% by mass or by volume of the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • compositions comprising platelets or platelet derivatives can be rehydrated with water (e.g., sterile water for injection) over about 10 minutes at about room temperature.
  • water e.g., sterile water for injection
  • the rehydration volume is about equal to the volume used to fill each vial of thrombosomes prior to drying.
  • the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) prepared as disclosed herein have a storage stability that is at least about equal to that of the platelets prior to the preparation.
  • the method further comprises cryopreserving the platelets or platelet derivatives prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., with a preparation agent, e.g., a preparation agent described herein).
  • a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein.
  • the method further comprises drying a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives, (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • the method may further comprise heating the composition following the drying step.
  • the method may further comprise rehydrating the composition following the freeze-drying step or the heating step.
  • the method further comprises freeze-drying a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)
  • the method may further comprise heating the composition following the freeze-drying step.
  • the method may further comprise rehydrating the composition following the freeze-drying step or the heating step.
  • the method further comprises cold storing the platelets, platelet derivatives, or the thrombosomes prior to administering the platelets, platelet derivatives, or thrombosomes (e.g., with a preparation agent, e.g., a preparation agent described herein).
  • a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein.
  • Storing conditions include, for example, standard room temperature storing (e.g., storing at a temperature ranging from about 20 to about 30° C.) or cold storing (e.g., storing at a temperature ranging from about 1 to about 10° C.).
  • the method further comprises cryopreserving, freeze-drying, thawing, rehydrating, and combinations thereof, a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • the method further comprises drying (e.g., freeze-drying) a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) (e.g., to form thrombosomes) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • the method may further comprise rehydrating the composition obtained from the drying step.
  • a method for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • the method can include diluting a starting material comprising platelets with an approximately equal weight ( ⁇ 10%) of a preparation agent (e.g., Buffer A, as provided in Example 1), concentrating the platelets to about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 cells/ ⁇ L ( ⁇ 250 ⁇ 10 3 ) and then washed with 2-4 diavolumes (DV) (e.g., about 2 diavolumes) of the preparation agent to form a TFF-treated composition.
  • the residual plasma percentage can be less than about 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content).
  • the cells can be diluted with the preparation agent or can be concentrated to fall within this range.
  • the method can further include lyophilizing the TFF-treated composition and subsequently treating the lyophilized composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) at about 80° C. for about 24 hours.
  • the method can further include a pathogen reduction step, for example, before diluting the starting material.
  • compositions produced by any of the methods described herein are compositions produced by any of the methods described herein.
  • any of the compositions provided herein can be made by the methods described herein.
  • Embodiment 1 is a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than or equal to 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 2 is the composition of embodiment 1, wherein the protein concentration of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 3 is the composition of embodiment 1 or 2, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • HLA human leukocyte antigen
  • Embodiment 4 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-3, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • HLA human leukocyte antigen
  • Embodiment 5 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-4, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • HNA human neutrophil antigen
  • Embodiment 6 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-5, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 7 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-6, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 8 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-7, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 9 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-8, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 10 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-9, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 11 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-10, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 12 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-11, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 13 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-12, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 14 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-13, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 15 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-14, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 16 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-15, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 17 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-16, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 18 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-17, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 19 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-18, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 20 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-19, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 21 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-20, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 22 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-21, wherein protein concentration is determined by absorbance at 280 nanometers (nm) with a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 23 is the composition of embodiment 22, wherein the absorbance at 280 nm is less than or equal to 1.7 AU.
  • Embodiment 24 is the composition of embodiment 22, wherein the absorbance at 280 nm is less than or equal to 1.66 AU.
  • Embodiment 25 is the composition of embodiment 22, wherein the absorbance at 280 nm is less than or equal to 1.6 AU.
  • Embodiment 26 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-25, wherein the platelet count is at least 200 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 27 is the composition of embodiment 26, wherein the platelet count is at least 2250 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 28 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-27, wherein the composition has an erythrocyte count less than 0.2 ⁇ 10 6 erythrocytes/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 29 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-27, wherein the composition further comprises erythrocytes.
  • Embodiment 30 is the composition embodiment 29, wherein the erythrocyte count is less than 0.2 ⁇ 10 6 erythrocytes/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 31 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-30, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 32 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-31, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 33 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-32, wherein the composition is negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 34 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 35 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-34, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 36 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-35, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 37 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 38 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 39 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 40 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 41 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 42 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 43 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 44 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 45 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 46 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-45, wherein the aqueous medium further comprises a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 47 is the composition of embodiment 46, wherein the buffering agent is HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • Embodiment 48 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-47, wherein the base is sodium bicarbonate.
  • Embodiment 49 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-48, wherein the loading agent is a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 50 is the composition of embodiment 49, wherein the monosaccharide is selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • Embodiment 51 is the composition of embodiment 49, wherein the monosaccharide is trehalose.
  • Embodiment 52 is the composition of any one of embodiments 49-51, wherein the polysaccharide is polysucrose.
  • Embodiment 53 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-52, wherein the salt is sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 54 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-53, wherein the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 55 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-54, wherein the composition is prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, centrifugation of a starting material comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • THF tangential flow filtration
  • Embodiment 56 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 57 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 58 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 59 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 60 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-59, wherein the starting material is:
  • Embodiment 61 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-60, wherein the starting material has a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/ml.
  • Embodiment 62 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-61, wherein the starting material comprises donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 63 is the composition of embodiment 62, wherein the donor blood product is pooled donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 64 is the composition of any one of embodiments 62-63, wherein the starting material comprises donor apheresis material.
  • Embodiment 65 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-64, wherein TFF comprises concentrating.
  • Embodiment 66 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-65, wherein TFF comprises diafiltering.
  • Embodiment 67 is the composition of embodiment 66, wherein diafiltering comprises diafiltering with at least two diavolumes.
  • Embodiment 68 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-67, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange.
  • Embodiment 69 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-68, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 1 ⁇ m.
  • Embodiment 70 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-68, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 0.45 ⁇ m.
  • Embodiment 71 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-70, wherein TFF is performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C.
  • Embodiment 72 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 73 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 74 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 75 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 76 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 77 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 78 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-77, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 79 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-77, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 80 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-77, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 81 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-80, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 82 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-80, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 83 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-82, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange into a preparation agent comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 84 is the composition of embodiment 83, wherein the buffering agent is HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • Embodiment 85 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-84, wherein the base is sodium bicarbonate.
  • Embodiment 86 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-85, wherein the loading agent is a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 87 is the composition of embodiment 86, wherein the monosaccharide is selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • Embodiment 88 is the composition of embodiment 86, wherein the monosaccharide is trehalose.
  • Embodiment 89 is the composition of any one of embodiments 86-88, wherein the polysaccharide is polysucrose.
  • Embodiment 90 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-89, wherein the salt is sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 91 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-90, wherein the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 92 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-91, wherein centrifugation comprises centrifugation at 1400 ⁇ g to about 1550 ⁇ g.
  • Embodiment 93 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-91, wherein centrifugation comprises centrifugation at 1450 ⁇ g to about 1500 ⁇ g.
  • Embodiment 94 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-91, wherein the process does not comprise centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets.
  • Embodiment 95 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 96 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 97 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 98 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 99 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-98, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%.
  • Embodiment 100 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-98, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%.
  • Embodiment 101 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-98, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 102 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-101, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 103 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-101, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 104 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-101, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 105 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-104, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 106 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-104, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 107 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-104, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 108 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-107, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 25%.
  • Embodiment 109 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-107, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 110 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-107, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 70%.
  • Embodiment 111 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-110, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%.
  • Embodiment 112 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-110, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 114 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-110, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%.
  • Embodiment 115 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 116 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 117 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 118 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 119 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-118, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane.
  • Embodiment 120 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-119, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 121 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-119, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 122 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-121, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 123 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-121, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 124 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-123, wherein the platelet derivatives comprise thrombosomes.
  • Embodiment 125 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1 or 22-124, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 126 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-5 or 22-125, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 127 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-5 or 22-126, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 15% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 128 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-9 or 22-127, wherein the protein concentration is about 8% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 129 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-9 or 22-128, wherein the protein concentration is about 7% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 130 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 25 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • TPH thrombin peak height
  • Embodiment 131 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 50 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • TPH thrombin peak height
  • Embodiment 132 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a potency of at least 1.5 thrombin generation potency units (TGPU) per 10 6 particles.
  • TGPU thrombin generation potency units
  • Embodiment 133 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of at least about 70 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L, produce an occlusion time of less than 14 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • T-TAS total thrombus-formation analysis system
  • Embodiment 134 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 70 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L produce an occlusion time of less than 12 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • T-TAS total thrombus-formation analysis system
  • Embodiment 135 is a process for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the process comprising:
  • Embodiment 136 is the process of embodiment 125, wherein the starting material is:
  • Embodiment 137 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-136, wherein the starting material has a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/mL.
  • Embodiment 138 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-137, wherein the starting material comprises donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 139 is the process of embodiment 138, wherein the donor blood product is pooled donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 140 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-139, wherein the starting material comprises donor apheresis material.
  • Embodiment 141 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-140, wherein TFF comprises concentrating.
  • Embodiment 142 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-141, wherein TFF comprises diafiltering.
  • Embodiment 143 is the process of embodiment 142, wherein diafiltering comprises diafiltering with at least two diavolumes.
  • Embodiment 144 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-143, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange.
  • Embodiment 145 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-144, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 1 ⁇ m.
  • Embodiment 146 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-145, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 ⁇ m to about 0.45 ⁇ m.
  • Embodiment 147 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-146, wherein TFF is performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C.
  • Embodiment 148 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-147, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 149 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 150 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-149, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 151 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-150, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 152 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-151, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 153 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-152, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 154 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-153, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 155 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-154, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 156 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-155, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 157 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-156, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 158 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-156, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 platelets/ ⁇ L.
  • Embodiment 159 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-158, wherein TFF comprises diafiltering with a preparation agent comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 160 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-159, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange into a preparation agent comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 161 is the process of any one of embodiments 149-160, wherein the buffering agent is HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • Embodiment 162 is the process of any one of embodiments 149-161, wherein the base is sodium bicarbonate.
  • Embodiment 163 is the process of any one of embodiments 149-162, wherein the loading agent is a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 164 is the process of embodiment 163, wherein the monosaccharide is selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, xylose, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 165 is the process of embodiment 163, wherein the monosaccharide is trehalose.
  • Embodiment 166 is the process of any one of embodiments 163-165, wherein the polysaccharide is polysucrose.
  • Embodiment 167 is the process of any one of embodiments 159-166, wherein the salt is sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 168 is the process of any one of embodiments 159-167, wherein the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 169 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-168, wherein the process does not comprise centrifugation of the starting material comprising platelets, the diluted starting material comprising platelets, the concentrated platelet composition, or the combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 170 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-169, wherein the process does not comprise centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets.
  • Embodiment 171 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 172 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 173 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 174 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 175 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-174, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 176 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-175, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • HLA human leukocyte antigen
  • Embodiment 177 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-176, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • HLA human leukocyte antigen
  • Embodiment 178 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-17, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • HNA human neutrophil antigen
  • Embodiment 179 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-178, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 180 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-179, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 181 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-180, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 182 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-181, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 183 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-182, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 184 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-183, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 185 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-184, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 186 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-185, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 187 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-186, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 188 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-187, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 189 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-188, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 190 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-189, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 191 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-190, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 192 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-191, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 193 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-192, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 194 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-193, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 195 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-194, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 196 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-195, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 197 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-196, wherein the composition is negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 198 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-197, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 199 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-198, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 200 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-199, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 201 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-200, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 202 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-201, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 203 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-202, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 204 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-203, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 205 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-204, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 206 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-205, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 207 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-206, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 208 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-207, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 209 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-208, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 210 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 211 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 212 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 213 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 214 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-213, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%.
  • Embodiment 215 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-213, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%.
  • Embodiment 216 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-213, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 217 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-216, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 218 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-216, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 219 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-216, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 220 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-219, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 221 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-219, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 222 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-219, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 223 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-222, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 25%.
  • Embodiment 224 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-222, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 225 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-222, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 75%.
  • Embodiment 226 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%.
  • Embodiment 227 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 228 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 15%.
  • Embodiment 229 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%.
  • Embodiment 230 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 231 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 232 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 233 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 234 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-233, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane.
  • Embodiment 235 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-234, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 236 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-234, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 237 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-236, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 238 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-236, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 239 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-238, wherein the platelet derivatives comprise thrombosomes.
  • Embodiment 240 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-239, further comprising a pathogen reduction step.
  • Embodiment 241 is the process of embodiment 240, wherein the pathogen reduction step precedes TFF.
  • Embodiment 242 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-241, further comprising lyophilizing the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • Embodiment 243 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-241, further comprising cryopreserving the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • Embodiment 244 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-243, further comprising thermally treating the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • Embodiment 245 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-174, or 195-244, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 246 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-149, 154-178, or 195-245, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 247 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-178, or 195-246, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 15% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 248 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-182, or 195-247, wherein the protein concentration is about 8% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 249 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-182, or 195-248, wherein the protein concentration is about 7% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 250 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 25 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • TPH thrombin peak height
  • Embodiment 251 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 50 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • TPH thrombin peak height
  • Embodiment 252 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a potency of at least 1.5 thrombin generation potency units (TGPU) per 10 6 particles.
  • TGPU thrombin generation potency units
  • Embodiment 253 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of at least about 70 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L, produce an occlusion time of less than 14 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • T-TAS total thrombus-formation analysis system
  • Embodiment 254 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of at least about 70 ⁇ 10 3 particles/ ⁇ L, produce an occlusion time of less than 12 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • T-TAS total thrombus-formation analysis system
  • Embodiment 255 is a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium prepared by the process of any one of embodiments 135-254.
  • Embodiment 256 is a process for preparing freeze-dried platelets, comprising:
  • Embodiment 257 is a composition comprising freeze-dried platelets, prepared by the process of embodiment 235.
  • Embodiment 258 is a method for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the method comprising:
  • Embodiment 259 is the method of embodiment 258, wherein diluting comprises diluting with an approximately equal weight ( ⁇ 10%) of the preparation agent.
  • Embodiment 260 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-259, further comprising a pathogen reduction step.
  • Embodiment 261 is the method of embodiment 260, wherein the pathogen reduction step occurs before diluting the starting material.
  • Embodiment 262 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-261, wherein residual plasma percentage is less than or equal to about 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content).
  • Embodiment 263 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-262, wherein following washing, if the concentration of the cells in the TFF-treated composition is not about 2000 ⁇ 10 3 cells/ ⁇ L ( ⁇ 300 ⁇ 10 3 ), diluting the preparation agent or can be concentrated to fall within this range.
  • Embodiment 264 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-263, further comprising lyophilizing the TFF-treated composition to form a lyophilized composition.
  • Embodiment 265 is the method of embodiment 264, further comprising treating the lyophilized composition at about 80° C. for about 24 hours.
  • Embodiment 266 is a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives prepared by the method of any one of embodiments 258-265.
  • Embodiment 267 is a method of treating a clotting-related disease or condition in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of the composition of any of embodiments 1 to 134, 255 or 266.
  • Embodiment 268 is the method of embodiment 267, wherein the clotting-related disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of Von Willebrand Disease, a hemophilia, thrombasthenia, thrombocytopenia, thrombocytopenic purpura, trauma, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 269 is a method of treating a clotting-related disease or condition in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a composition prepared by the process of any of embodiments 135 to 254.
  • Embodiment 270 is the method of embodiment 269, wherein the clotting-related disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of Von Willebrand Disease, a hemophilia, thrombasthenia, thrombocytopenia, thrombocytopenic purpura, trauma, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 271 is a method of treating a clotting-related treating a disease or condition subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a composition prepared by the process of any of embodiments 258 to 266.
  • Embodiment 272 is the method of embodiment 271, wherein the clotting-related disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of Von Willebrand Disease, a hemophilia, thrombasthenia, thrombocytopenia, thrombocytopenic purpura, trauma, or a combination thereof.
  • Apheresis platelets underwent tangential flow filtration in accordance with a standard operating procedure, including the following process steps: platelet dilution, platelet concentration and platelet washing.
  • the platelet donor units are initially pooled into a common vessel.
  • the platelets may or may not be initially diluted with an acidified washing buffer (e.g., a control buffer) to reduce platelet activation during processing.
  • the platelets can undergo two processing pathways; either washed with control buffer until a desired residual component is reached (e.g., donor plasma) before being concentrated to a final product concentration or the platelets are concentrated to a final product concentration before being washed with control buffer until a desired residual component is reached (e.g., donor plasma).
  • TFF processed platelets are then filled into vials, lyophilized and thermally treated.
  • Buffer A was used for all steps of the TFF process in this Example. The process was carried out at a temperature of 18-24° C.
  • Buffer A Component Value ( ⁇ 1%) HEPES 7.6 mM NaCl 60 mM KCl 3.84 mM Dextrose 2.4 mM NaHCO 3 9.6 mM Trehalose 80 mM Ethanol 0.8% Polysucrose 6% (w/v) pH 6.6-6.8
  • Platelets were loaded onto the TFF (PendoTECH controller system), which was prepared with a Repligen TFF Cassette (XPM45L01E). The platelets were diluted with an equal weight ( ⁇ 10%) of Buffer A. The platelets were concentrated to about 2250 ⁇ 10 3 cells/ ⁇ L ( ⁇ 250 ⁇ 10 3 ) and then washed with approximately 2 diavolumes (DV) of Buffer A. The target plasma percentage was typically less than 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content). Removal of plasma proteins was monitored through 280 nm UV absorbance against known correlations. Following washing, if the concentration of the cells was not 2000 ⁇ 10 3 cells/ ⁇ L ( ⁇ 300 ⁇ 10 3 ), the cells were either diluted with Buffer A or were concentrated to fall within this range.
  • TFF Repligen TFF Cassette
  • thrombosomes were typically rehydrated with water over 10 minutes at room temperature. In general, the rehydration volume is equal to the volume used to fill each vial of thrombosomes prior to drying.
  • samples were drawn at UV readings correlating to about 51% relative plasma volume, about 8.1% relative plasma volume, about 6.0% relative plasma volume, and about 1.3% relative plasma readings. Low volume aliquots were sampled throughout each processing step with about 6.0% and under samples.
  • Thrombosomes Batch A was produced by the TFF method described in Example 1 using apheresis platelets collected from high- ⁇ HLA titer donors as reported by a platelet supplier.
  • Bead types were evaluated: one coated with HLA Class I antigens and the other coated with HLA Class II antigens. Bead gating was performed as described in the FLOWPRATM Screen Test instructions. “ ⁇ HLA Positive” populations are gated on the basis of a George King (GK) PPP (platelet-poor plasma) negative control and a single-donor fresh-drawn negative control. Additional negative controls are collected following production to confirm ideal placement of these positivity gates.
  • GK George King
  • PPP platelet-poor plasma
  • FITC-H histograms from each HLA class are given for each sample. Positivity >1% is positive. Fluorescence ratios are reported against the GK PPP negative control (Class I and Class II bead FITC-H intensity). Fluorescence ratios >1.0 are positive. As additional negative controls are collected these positivity gates and fluorescence ratios will be updated.
  • Donor #1 HLA Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 0.2% with fluorescence ratio 0.3; average positivity for Class II is 16.5% with fluorescence ratio 1.6. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 4 A and FIG. 4 B ).
  • Donor #2 HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 1.3% with fluorescence ratio 1.4; average positivity for Class II is 20.3% with fluorescence ratio 1.9. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 5 A and FIG. 5 B ).
  • Donor #3 HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 85.2% with fluorescence ratio 14.4. Average positivity for Class II is 12.0% with fluorescence ratio 0.8. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 6 A and FIG. 6 B ).
  • Donor #4 HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 83.5% with fluorescence ratio 14.5. Average positivity for Class II is 12.6% with fluorescence ratio 0.8. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 7 A and FIG. 7 B ).
  • Donor #5 HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 4.9% with fluorescence ratio 1.2. Average positivity for Class II is 1.3% with fluorescence ratio 0.8. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 8 A and FIG. 8 B ).
  • Donor #6 HLA Class I Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 2.7% with fluorescence ratio 0.9. Average positivity for Class II is 0.3% with fluorescence ratio 0.7. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 9 A and FIG. 9 B ).
  • Donor #7 HLA Class II Positive. Average positivity for from triplicate data Class I is 0.7% with fluorescence ratio 0.5. Average positivity for Class II is 9.0% with fluorescence ratio 1.3. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 10 A and FIG. 10 B ).
  • Plasma (8.1%): HLA Class I Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 2.4% with fluorescence ratio 1.0. Average positivity for Class II is 0.2% with fluorescence ratio 0.5. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 13 A and FIG. 13 B ).
  • Plasma (6.0%): Borderline HLA Class I Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 1.1% with fluorescence ratio 1.0. Average positivity for Class II is 0.2% with fluorescence ratio 0.5. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 14 A and FIG. 14 B ).
  • Plasma (1.3%): HLA Negative. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 0.4% with fluorescence ratio 0.2. Average positivity for Class II is 0.1% with fluorescence ratio 0.4. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 15 A and FIG. 15 B ).
  • Thrombosomes batch were produced by the TFF method described in Example 1 and assayed for cell surface marker expression using flow cytometry.
  • Flow cytometry was used to assess thrombosomes for expression of CD41, CD62, and phosphatidylserine (PS).
  • Samples included approximately 270,000/ ⁇ L thrombosomes during staining and were diluted approximately 1:34 before the sample was analyzed in the cytometer.
  • Thrombosome samples were rehydrated and diluted 1:2 in deionized water.
  • a stock of anti-CD41 was diluted by adding 47.6 ⁇ L of antibody to 52.4 ⁇ L of HMTA.
  • Samples stained with anti-CD41 were made by adding 10 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes to 10 ⁇ L HMTA and 10 ⁇ L of diluted CD41 antibody.
  • An anti-CD62 master mix was prepared by combining 12 ⁇ L anti-CD62 with 23.8 ⁇ L anti-CD41 and 64.2 ⁇ L of HMTA.
  • An isotype control mix was made in the same manner.
  • Samples stained with anti-CD62 were made by adding 10 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes to 20 ⁇ L of the anti-CD62 master.
  • the isotype master mix was used to make isotype control samples in the same manner.
  • An annexin V (AV) master mix was prepared by combining 11.7 of AV with 83.3 ⁇ L of anti-CD41 and 80 ⁇ L of HMTA.
  • Sample stained with AV were made by adding 20 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes containing 50 mM GPRP to 20 ⁇ L of HMTA containing 15 mM CaCl 2 and 20 ⁇ L of the AV master mix. Negative gating control samples were made in the same manner using HMTA without calcium to prevent AV binding to PS. All samples were incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes. After incubation 1 mL HBS was added to all samples. HBS used to dilute AV test samples contained 5 mM CaCl 2 . Anti-CD41 binding was used to identify the population of interest. CD62 expression and PS expression was assessed by anti-CD62 and AV binding within the CD41 positive population.
  • Glycoprotein IIb also known as antigen CD41 expression was assayed using an anti-CD41 antibody (4.8 ⁇ L, Beckman Coulter part #IM1416U). The assayed thrombosomes demonstrated CD41 positivity (Table 5; FIG. 16 )
  • PS expression was assayed using annexin V (AV) (1.3 ⁇ L, BD Biosciences Cat. No. 550475).
  • AV is a calcium-dependent phospholipid binding protein.
  • the assayed thrombosomes demonstrated AV positivity (Table 6; FIG. 17 ).
  • P-selectin also called CD62P expression was assayed using an anti-CD62P antibody (2.4 ⁇ L, BD Biosciences Cat. No. 550888). The assayed thrombosomes demonstrated CD62 positivity (Table 7, FIG. 18 )
  • Thrombin Generation was measured at 4.8 ⁇ 10 3 thrombosomes/ ⁇ l in the presence of PRP Reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids using the below protocol. On average, the Thrombin Peak Height (TPH) for a thrombosomes sample was 60.3 nM. Cephalin was used as a positive control. (Table 8; FIG. 19 )
  • a rehydrated sample of thrombosomes was diluted to 7,200 particles per ⁇ L based on the flow cytometry particle count using 30% solution of Octaplas in control buffer.
  • sample wells were generated by adding 20 ⁇ L of PRP reagent (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86196) and 80 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes.
  • Calibrator wells were generated by adding 20 ⁇ L of Thrombin Calibrator reagent (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86197) to 80 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes. The plate was loaded into the plate reader and incubated in the dark at 40° C. for 10 minutes.
  • FluCa solution was prepared by adding 40 ⁇ L of FluCa substrate (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86197) to 1.6 mL of Fluo-Buffer (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86197) warmed to 37° C. and vortexed to mix.
  • the FluCa solution was aspirated into the dispensing syringe and 20 ⁇ L was mechanically dispensed into each reaction well, bringing the final thrombosomes concentration in each well to 4,800 particles per ⁇ L and starting the thrombin generation reaction. Thrombin generation was measured via fluorescence in each well over the course of 75 minutes.
  • GPIIb/IIIa is a platelet fibrinogen receptor also known as CD41/CD61 complex.
  • ADP promotes the active form of the GPIIb/IIIa complex.
  • Antibody 9F9 binds to fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane. The presence of fibrinogen on the cell membrane is thus indicative of thrombosomes capable of forming clots.
  • a vial of thrombosomes prepared according to Example 1 was rehydrated using 10 mL of deionized water. An aliquot of thrombosomes was diluted to a final concentration of 1 ⁇ 10 5 particles/ ⁇ L using HMTA (HEPES Modified Tyrode's Albumin). Samples were prepared as shown in Table 11. Unstained samples were prepared by adding 10 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes to 20 ⁇ L of HMTA. FITC isotype control samples were prepared by adding 10 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes to 10 ⁇ L of the isotype control antibody (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 555748) and 10 ⁇ L of HMTA.
  • HMTA HEPES Modified Tyrode's Albumin
  • Samples stained with 9F9 were prepared by adding 10 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes to 10 ⁇ L of the 9F9 antibody (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 340507 and 10 ⁇ L of HMTA.
  • Samples stained with PAC-1 were prepared by adding 10 ⁇ L of diluted thrombosomes to 5 ⁇ L of the isotype control antibody and 15 ⁇ L of HMTA. All samples were prepared in duplicated using a total of 1 ⁇ 10 6 particles per reaction mixture. Samples were incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes away from open light. After incubation, all samples were diluted with 1 mL of HBS and acquired using the ACEA NovoCyte flow cytometer.
  • the fluorescent signal generated by PAC-1 was used to determine the expression of activated GPIIb/IIIa receptors without bound fibrinogen.
  • the fluorescent signal from 9F9 was used to determine binding of fibrinogen to the surface receptors on thrombosomes.
  • HTMA HPES modified Tyrode's albumin
  • CD47 is a cell-surface marker used in self-recognition. Absence of this marker can, in some cases, lead to phagocytosis.
  • Example 2 One vial of thrombosomes prepared as described in Example 1 was rehydrated with 10 mL sterile water for injection and stained with increasing volumes of anti-CD47 antibody conjugated to Pacific Blue (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 561564) or a corresponding isotype control (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 560373). All samples contained 1 million cells. This titration resulted in a maximum fluorescent signal that was ⁇ 5 ⁇ over background ( FIG. 22 A ) and an overall CD47 positivity of ⁇ 40% (Table 12). An exemplary histogram is shown in FIG. 22 B .
  • V450 fluorescence in the test samples was used to assess antibody binding to CD47 on the thrombosome surface.
  • V450 fluorescence of the isotype control samples was used to monitor nonspecific binding.
  • Table 11 shows the mean fluorescence intensity of samples with various amounts of antibody (anti-CD47 or isotype control).
  • Table 12 shows the CD47 percent positivity at various concentrations of anti-CD47 antibody.
  • a second round of testing was performed on a new TFF thrombosomes sample using an increased amount of antibody and decreased number of thrombosomes per sample in order to improve the intensity of the signal caused by anti-CD47 binding to the thrombosomes.
  • the initial concentration of a thrombosome sample was determined using the AcT diff 2 and the concentration of a 1 mL aliquot was adjusted to 25 ⁇ 10 3 per ⁇ L using HMTA. Samples were stained in duplicate with increasing amounts of antibody according to Table 13 below. The final volume for each sample was held constant at 40 ⁇ L. The total number of thrombosomes in each sample was help constant at 250 ⁇ 10 3 per ⁇ L. This sample preparation was repeated using an isotype control antibody in place of the anti-CD47.
  • Table 14 shows the mean fluorescence intensity of samples with various amounts of antibody (anti-CD47 or isotype control).
  • Table 15 shows the CD47 percent positivity at various concentrations of anti-CD47 antibody.
  • FIGS. 23 A-C are histograms that are normalized to a relative intensity so that the sum of the intensity of each data point equals 1.0. For example, if a particular data point has a y-axis value of 0.1 then it can be typically interpreted that the data point makes up 10% of the scattering intensity of the sample.
  • hIDSP human In-Date Stored Platelets
  • DLS dynamic light scattering
  • the DLS instrument has a built-in viscosity setting for samples that are in plasma, such as apheresis units. This viscosity setting was used for hIDSP samples. The viscosity of this setting is 1.060 cP (centipoise). After the plasma viscosity setting was selected, the sample was analyzed. From the same hIDSP aliquot, a 2 nd and 3 rd sample were drawn into a capillary and analyzed with this hIDSP protocol, for triplicate analysis. Microparticle percentage was then determined from the data.
  • Pre-Lyo samples are an in-process sample from the thrombosomes manufacturing process. This sample type is the material taken right before lyophilization. A viscosity measurement of the sample was taken in order to analysis these samples with DLS.
  • the viscometer (Rheosense ⁇ VISC) has a built-in oven that is used to bring the sample to the temperature of the DLS instrument (37° C.). Prior to viscosity analysis of the sample the oven must be heated to 37° C.
  • To determine the viscosity of the pre-lyo sample a 400-350 ⁇ L sample was drawn into a syringe and inserted into the viscometer. After inserting the sample into the viscometer, the instrument temperature needs to reach 37° C. again.
  • Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol and diluted 1:5 in a mixture of SeraSub (CST Technologies, Inc.) and ACD.
  • the SeraSub/ACD diluent consists of a 1:9 dilution of ACD in SeraSub. 1 mL of the 1:5 dilution of thrombosomes was prepared for analysis by DLS.
  • a sample of the thrombosomes dilution was drawn into the capillary and inserted into the DLS instrument. The capillary sat in the instrument for 1 minute to allow the temperature and movement to equilibrate. The internal temperature of the machine is 37° C. After 1 minute of equilibration, the viscosity setting for the sample was chosen.
  • the viscosity used for the sample was 1.200 cP. After the viscosity was entered, the sample was analyzed. A 2 nd , 3 rd , and 4 th sample were drawn into a capillary and analyzed with this thrombosomes protocol, for quadruplicate analysis. Microparticle percentage was then determined from the data (and platelet radius where applicable).
  • microparticle content of human in-date stored platelets compared to rehydrated thrombosomes prepared according to Example 1 were compared using dynamic light scattering (DLS). The results are shown in FIGS. 24 A-C and Table 17.
  • Table 18 shows an analysis of pH and metabolites present in the preparation of thrombosomes as described in Example 1, including analyses of the raw platelet material, after an initial dilution, after the platelet derivatives were concentrated, and after the end of the diafiltration process, as determined using an i-STAT handheld blood analyzer and CG4+ cartridges.
  • Platelet samples for iStat analysis were collected at different processing steps in small volumes (1 ml).
  • the initial sample for iStat analysis named “Raw Material” was collected after the platelet donor units were pooled together but before any processing had occurred. Named “Initial Dilution”, The pooled platelet units were 1:1 diluted with Control Buffer before subjecting the platelets to TFF processing.
  • the “End of Conc” sample was drawn from the platelet product.
  • the “End of DV (Pre-Lyo)” sample was drawn as a representation of the product as it enters the lyophilizer.
  • pathogen reduction involves the use of a photosensitive nucleic acid-intercalating compound to alter the nucleic acids of pathogens upon illumination with an appropriate wavelength.
  • the INTERCEPT® system (made by Cerus) uses amotosalen, a nucleic acid intercalating compound that forms cross-links in nucleic acid upon illumination with UVA. Exemplary parameters for use of this system are shown in Table 19, and a schematic of the system is shown in FIG. 25 A , while exemplary process data are shown in FIGS. 25 B-C for 2.6 L of processed material in 198 minutes (approx. 14/min average).
  • Exemplary comparative data of functional characterization (AcT count and aggregation parameters) and cell-surface markers are shown in Tables 21 (hIDSPs), 22 (prior to lyophilization) and Table 23 (following lyophilization and rehydration in 10 mL sterile water for injection to a concentration of approximately 1.8 ⁇ 10 6 / ⁇ L (individual sample counts are shown in Table 23).
  • FIGS. 26 A-B show the similarity of rehydrated thrombosomes prepared with and without pathogen reduction treatment. A summary of these data is shown in Table 24.
  • FIG. 27 A shows the microparticle content of hiDSPs with or without pathogen reduction treatment.
  • FIGS. 27 B-C compare the microparticle content of the hiDSPs shown in FIG. 29 A and rehydrated thrombosomes prepared therefrom. A summary of these data is shown in Table 25.
  • FIG. 28 A shows the microparticle content of hiDSPs with or without pathogen reduction treatment.
  • FIGS. 28 B-C compare the microparticle content of the hiDSPs shown in FIG. 28 A and rehydrated thrombosomes prepared therefrom. A summary of these data is shown in Table 26.
  • platelets are platelets isolated from citrated whole blood approximately 3 hours post-collection.
  • the thrombosomes are Batch D, prepared by the method described in Example 1.
  • Table 27 is a sample layout for the experiments in this Example.
  • Platelet and thrombosome co-aggregation was evaluated by light transmission aggregometry. Platelets and thrombosomes were coincubated and evaluated by aggregometry+/ ⁇ platelet activation with 4 ⁇ -Phorbol-12-myristate-13-acetate (PMA). For fresh-drawn platelets isolated from whole blood, 100 ng/mL PMA was used. For stored platelets (i.e. apheresis platelets) 1000 ng/mL PMA was used.
  • PMA 4 ⁇ -Phorbol-12-myristate-13-acetate
  • Fresh platelets were isolated from ACD anticoagulated whole blood, washed, and diluted to 250,000 cells/ ⁇ L in HMTA. Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol and diluted to 250,000 cells/ ⁇ L in HMTA. An aliquot each of platelets in HMTA and Thrombosomes in HMTA were mixed in equal proportions. Platelets, Thrombosomes, and the mixed sample were evaluated by light transmission aggregometry (Helena AggRAM) in response to phorbol-myristate-acetate (PMA; 100 ng/mL) activation. The mixed samples were evaluated with and without a stir bar to assess the effect of stirring-induced shear on observed platelet-Thrombosomes coaggregation.
  • Helena AggRAM phorbol-myristate-acetate
  • FIG. 29 A shows the transmittance of the samples in Table 27, with and without agonist. Plus shear and minus agonist (black) mixing, thrombosomes and fresh-drawn platelets induced platelet activation and aggregation. PMA (gray) activated platelets and the magnitude of ⁇ transmittance suggests mixed aggregation with thrombosomes. Without shear there is either no activation or co-aggregation to less than the magnitude observed in FIG. 29 A .
  • FIG. 29 B shows the post-aggregation counts. Cases for which the white bar is greater than the other(s) suggest incorporation of thrombosomes into platelet aggregates.
  • the absolute decrease in particle count for the no agonist cases (black) is especially dramatic and unexpected.
  • thrombosomes are Batch H, prepared by the method described in Example 1.
  • Fresh platelets were isolated from ACD anticoagulated whole blood, washed, and diluted to 250,000 cells/ ⁇ L in HMTA. Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol and diluted to 250,000 cells/ ⁇ L in HMTA. An aliquot each of platelets in HMTA and thrombosomes in HMTA were mixed in equal proportions. Each group of platelets, thrombosomes, or mixed suspensions were divided equally; one group was treated with 1 mM GPRP to inhibit fibrin polymerization and one group remained untreated.
  • the peptide Gly-Pro-Arg-Pro (GPRP; Sigma-Aldrich item G1895) is a peptide that prevents fibrin polymerization. Platelets, thrombosomes, and the mixed samples were evaluated by light transmission aggregometry (Helena AggRAM) in response to thrombin (2.5 U/mL) activation.
  • FIG. 30 shows the results of co-aggregation experiments using platelets, thrombosomes, and 2:1 and 1:1 mixtures of platelets and thrombosomes, all activated with thrombin, either in the presence or absence of GPRP (1 mM).
  • total measured aggregation decreased as the thrombosome population increased, suggesting that the interaction of platelets and thrombosomes is partly caused by fibrin trapping.
  • the bulk of the co-aggregation interaction was platelet-mediated, and not reliant on fibrin trapping as evidenced by high measured aggregation even with GPRP.
  • Examples 12-13 show that platelets and thrombosomes co-aggregated under shear with (and to a lesser extent, without) platelet activation.
  • the fibrin polymerization inhibitor GPRP only slightly inhibited platelet-thrombosomes co-aggregation following thrombin activation.
  • thrombosomes are Batch H, prepared by the method described in Example 1.
  • RGDS Arg-Gly-Asp-Ser; Cayman Chemical item 15359
  • PMA phorbol myristate-acetate
  • Examples 12-14 show that thrombosomes readily co-aggregate with activated platelets (e.g., as evidenced by light transmission aggregometry). Spontaneous co-aggregation is induced by shear. Platelet-thrombosomes interactions are apparent in both buffer and plasma. While co-aggregation is not substantially inhibited by GPRP, co-aggregation is substantially inhibited by RGDS. This suggests a key role for active platelet-fibrinogen binding in the co-aggregation mechanism and that co-aggregation is not caused only by passive fibrin trapping.
  • a 10 mL aliquot of rehydrated thrombosomes were centrifuged at 2000 RPM for 30 minutes. The supernatant of the centrifuges sample was removed down to 1 mL and discarded. The sample was gently agitated to resuspend the Thrombosomes.
  • the concentrated thrombosomes were treated with 3% glutaraldehyde in 0.1 M cacodylate buffer at a pH of 7.4 for 2 hours with agitation every 15 minutes.
  • the thrombosomes were rinsed with sterile water three times and transferred to a 1% solution of osmium tetroxide for 1 hour with agitation every 15 minutes.
  • the sample was then rinsed three more times with sterile water and a 0.5 mL droplet was transferred to a polysulfone filter membrane.
  • the mounted sample was frozen with liquid nitrogen and dried under vacuum before being gold sputtered and imaged using scanning electron microscopy.
  • T-TAS® Total Thrombus-formation Analysis System
  • FUJIMORI KOGYO CO., LTD the sample is forced through collagen-coated microchannels using mineral oil. Changes in pressure are used to assess thrombus formation.
  • an AR chip can be used for analyzing the formation of a mixed white thrombus consisting chiefly of fibrin and activated platelets. It has a flow path (300 ⁇ m wide by 50 ⁇ m high) coated with collagen and tissue factors and can be used to analyze the clotting function and platelet function.
  • a PL chip can be used for analyzing the formation of a platelet thrombus consisting chiefly of activated platelets.
  • a PL chip has a flow path coated with collagen only and can be used to analyze the platelet function.
  • T-TAS® reagents (CaCTI, AR Chip) were warmed to 37° C. and Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol. An aliquot of the rehydrated Thrombosomes was washed by centrifugation at 3900 g ⁇ 10 minutes and resuspended to approximately 300,000 cells/ ⁇ L in sodium citrate anticoagulated platelet-poor plasma (PPP). CaCTI (20 ⁇ L) was mixed with Thrombosomes in PPP (480 ⁇ L) and run through the T-TAS AR Chip under high shear. Pressure in the system was monitored over 30 minutes or until the maximum backpressure in the channel was achieved.
  • CaCTI calcium citrate anticoagulated platelet-poor plasma
  • the T-TAS® instrument was prepared for use according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • AR Chips Diapharma Cat. #TC0101
  • CaCTI AR Chip Calcium Corn Trypsin Inhibitor
  • 300 uL of rehydrated thrombosomes were transferred to a 1.7 mL microcentrifuge tube and centrifuged at 3900 g ⁇ 10 minutes to pellet.
  • the thrombosomes pellet was resuspended in George King (GK) pooled normal human plasma or autologous plasma with or without autologous platelets to a concentration of approximately 100,000-450,000/uL, as determined by AcT counts (Beckman Coulter AcT Diff 2 Cell Counter).
  • 20 uL of CaCTI with 480 uL of thrombosomes sample in GK plasma were mixed with gentle pipetting. The sample was loaded and run on the T-TAS® according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Table 28 shows T-TAS® results from citrated whole blood, platelet-reduced citrated whole blood supplemented with varying concentrations of thrombosomes as prepared in Example 1, and George King Platelet Poor Plasma (GK PPP) supplemented with varying concentrations of thrombosomes as prepared in Example 1 in experiments run according to the manufacturer's instructions using the AR chip and High Shear instrument settings.
  • GK PPP George King Platelet Poor Plasma
  • FIGS. 33 A-B Time-elapsed results are shown in FIGS. 33 A-B .
  • Increasing the concentration of thrombosomes in platelet-reduced whole blood promoted more robust thrombus formation as measured by shortened occlusion times ( FIG. 33 A ).
  • Increasing the concentration of Thrombosomes in platelet poor plasma (PPP) promoted more robust thrombus formation as measured by shortened occlusion times ( FIG. 33 B ).
  • Table 29 shows T-TAS® results for platelet-poor plasma, with and without thrombosomes in the presence and absence of GPRP. Adding GPRP to prevent fibrinogen formation did not prevent the thrombosome-containing sample from reaching occlusion pressure. While the addition of GPRP to thrombosome samples in plasma prevents the formation of fibrin in the microcapillary channel ( FIGS. 33 C (no GPRP) and 33 D (GPRP), both in GK PPP), the addition of GPRP to thrombosomes (PPP) did not prevent thrombus formation ( FIG. 33 E ).

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Water Supply & Treatment (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Anesthesiology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Developmental Biology & Embryology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Material From Animals Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
  • External Artificial Organs (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)

Abstract

Provided herein are materials and methods for the preparation of blood products. In one aspect, provided herein is a composition including platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 18/056,220, filed Nov. 16, 2022; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 18/056,220 is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/865,215, filed on May 1, 2020, now U.S. Pat. No. 11,529,587, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/843,061, filed on May 3, 2019, and 62/936,122, filed on Nov. 15, 2019, each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • STATEMENT OF GOVERNMENT INTEREST
  • This invention was made with government support under Contract No. HHSO100201300021 awarded by the Biomedical Advanced Research and Development Authority (BARDA) of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. The government has certain rights in the invention.
  • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The present disclosure generally relates to blood products, such as blood products with reduced HLA antibody content, and methods of producing such blood products.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Blood is a complex mixture of numerous components. In general, blood can be described as comprising four main parts: red blood cells, white blood cells, platelets, and plasma. The first three are cellular or cell-like components, whereas the fourth (plasma) is a liquid component comprising a wide and variable mixture of salts, proteins, and other factors necessary for numerous bodily functions. The components of blood can be separated from each other by various methods. In general, differential centrifugation is most commonly used currently to separate the different components of blood based on size and, in some applications, density.
  • Inactivated platelets, which are also commonly referred to as thrombocytes, are small, often irregularly-shaped (e.g., discoidal or ovoidal) megakaryocyte-derived components of blood that are involved in the clotting process. They aid in protecting the body from excessive blood loss due not only to trauma or injury, but to normal physiological activity as well. Platelets are considered crucial in normal hemostasis, providing the first line of defense against blood escaping from injured blood vessels. Platelets generally function by adhering to the lining of broken blood vessels, in the process becoming activated, changing to an amorphous shape, and interacting with components of the clotting system that are present in plasma or are released by the platelets themselves or other components of the blood. Purified platelets have found use in treating subjects with low platelet count (thrombocytopenia) and abnormal platelet function (thrombasthenia). Concentrated platelets are often used to control bleeding after injury or during acquired platelet function defects or deficiencies, for example those occurring during surgery and those due to the presence of platelet inhibitors.
  • SUMMARY
  • This document is based, at least in part, on the production of blood products (e.g., a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) with reduced levels of free protein (e.g., antibodies (e.g., Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA) antibodies, or Human Neutrophil Antigen (HNA) antibodies)).
  • Provided herein is a composition including platelets and an aqueous medium, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Implementations can have one or more of the following features. The protein concentration of the aqueous medium can be less than 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can be a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be determined by absorbance at 280 nanometers (nm) with a path length of 0.5 cm. In some embodiments, the absorbance at 280 nm can be less than 1.7 AU. In some embodiments, the absorbance at 280 nm can be less than 1.66 AU. In some embodiments, the absorbance at 280 nm can be less than 1.6 AU. In some embodiments, the platelet count can be at least 200×103 platelets/μL. In some embodiments, the platelet count can be at least 2250×103 platelets/μL. In some embodiments, the composition can have an erythrocyte count less than 0.2×106 erythrocytes/μL. In some embodiments, the composition can further include erythrocytes. In some embodiments, the erythrocyte count can be less than 0.2×106 erythrocytes/μL. The composition can be negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The composition can be negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The composition can be negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 1%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 1%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, can be less than 1%. The percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, can be less than 1%. The aqueous medium can further include a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent. The buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid). The base can be sodium bicarbonate. The loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof. The monosaccharide can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose. The monosaccharide can be trehalose. The polysaccharide can be polysucrose. The salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof. The organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof. The composition can be prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, centrifugation of a starting material comprising platelets, or a combination thereof. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The starting material can be (a) positive for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (b) positive for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (c) positive for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, or (d) one or more of (a), (b), and (c). The starting material can have a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/ml. The starting material can include donor blood product. The donor blood product can be pooled donor blood product. The starting material can include donor apheresis material. The TFF can include concentrating. The TFF can include diafiltering. The diafiltering can include diafiltering with at least two diavolumes. The TFF can include buffer exchange. The TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 1 μm. The TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 0.45 μm. The TFF can be performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000×103 platelets/μL. The TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250×103 platelets/μL. The TFF can include buffer exchange into a buffer comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent. The buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid). The base can be sodium bicarbonate. The loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof. The monosaccharide can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose. The monosaccharide can be trehalose. The polysaccharide can be polysucrose. The salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof. The organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof. The centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1400×g to about 1550×g. The centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1450×g to about 1500×g. The process can lack centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets. The composition can include less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The composition can include less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The composition can include less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The composition can include less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 85%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets. The platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets. The platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 70%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 75%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 80%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 15%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 82%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 85%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L. The platelet derivatives can include thrombosomes.
  • Also provided herein is a process for preparing a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium, the process including tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, centrifugation of a starting material comprising platelets, or a combination thereof, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Implementations can include one or more of the following features. The starting material can be (a) positive for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (b) positive for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, (c) positive for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test, or (d) one or more of a), b), and c). The starting material can have a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/mL. The starting material can include donor blood product. The donor blood product can be pooled donor blood product. The starting material can include donor apheresis material. The TFF can include concentrating. The TFF can include diafiltering. The diafiltration can include diafiltering with at least two diavolumes. The TFF can include buffer exchange. The TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 1 μm. The TFF can be carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 0.45 μm. The TFF can be performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm. The TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000×103 platelets/μL. The TFF can be carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250×103 platelets/μL. The TFF can include buffer exchange into a buffer comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent. The buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid). The base can be sodium bicarbonate. The loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof. The monosaccharide can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose. The monosaccharide can be trehalose. The polysaccharide can be polysucrose. The salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof. The organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof. The centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1400×g to about 1550×g. The centrifugation can include centrifugation at 1450×g to about 1500×g. The process can lack centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process including tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof. The protein concentration can be less than 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The protein concentration can be less than 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The aqueous medium can have a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma. The composition can be negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The composition can be negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The composition can be negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, can be less than 1%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, can be less than 1%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, can be less than 1%. The percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, can be less than 5%. The percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, can be less than 3%. The percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, can be less than 1%. The process of any one of claims 125-199, wherein the composition comprises less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The composition can include less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The composition can include less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The composition can include less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 85%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets. The platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets. The platelets or platelet derivatives can retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 70%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 75%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 80%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 15%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 82%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 85%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%. The platelets or platelet derivatives can have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L. The aqueous medium can have a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L. The platelet derivatives can include thrombosomes. The process can further include a pathogen reduction step. The pathogen reduction step can precede TFF. The process can further include lyophilizing the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives. The process can further include thermally treating the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • Also provided herein is a composition including platelets and an aqueous medium prepared by any of the processes described herein.
  • Also provided herein is a process for preparing freeze-dried platelets, including (a) preparing a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium using any of the processes described herein and (b) freeze-drying the composition comprising platelets and the aqueous medium.
  • Also provided herein is a composition comprising freeze-dried platelets, prepared by any of the processes described herein.
  • Also provided herein is a method for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the method including diluting a starting material comprising platelets to form a diluted starting material, concentrating the platelets to about 2250×103 cells/4, (±250×103) to form a concentrated platelet composition, and washing the concentrated platelet composition with at least 2 diavolumes (DV) of the preparation agent to form a TFF-treated composition.
  • Implementations can include one or more of the following features. Diluting can include diluting with an approximately equal weight (±10%) of the preparation agent. The method can further include a pathogen reduction step. The pathogen reduction step can occur before diluting the starting material. The residual plasma percentage can be less than about 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content). Following washing, if the concentration of the cells in the TFF-treated composition is not about 2000×103 cells/4, (±300×103), the method can further include diluting the preparation agent or can be concentrated to fall within this range. The method can further include lyophilizing the TFF-treated composition to form a lyophilized composition. The method can further include treating the lyophilized composition at about 80° C. for about 24 hours.
  • Also provided herein is a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives prepared by any of the methods described herein.
  • The materials and methods described herein can provide several advantages. First, they can allow for the collection of otherwise deferred donors and reduce the competition for apheresis materials.
  • DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1A shows initial gate placement for identification of Class I and Class II HLA FLOWPRA™ beads in PBS using side scattering vs. forward scattering.
  • FIG. 1B shows initial gate placement for identification of Class I and Class II HLA FLOWPRA™ beads in PBS using phycoerythrin fluorescence vs. forward scattering.
  • FIG. 2A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (in triplicate), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class I HLA (in triplicate).
  • FIG. 2B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (in triplicate), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class II HLA (in triplicate).
  • FIG. 2C shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (single data set), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class I HLA (single data set).
  • FIG. 2D shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in PBS, supplier platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (single data set), and donor platelet-poor plasma gated on Class II HLA (single data set).
  • FIG. 3A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in George King PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 3B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in George King PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 4A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 1 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 4B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 1 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 5A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 2 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 5B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 2 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 6A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 3 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 6B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 3 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 7A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 4 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 7B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 4 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 8A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 5 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 8B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 5 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 9A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 6 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 9B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 6 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 10A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 7 PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 10B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads in Donor 7 PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 11A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA.
  • FIG. 11B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA.
  • FIG. 12A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to 50% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 12B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to 50% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 13A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 8% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 13B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 8% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 14A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 6% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 14B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 6% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 15A shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class I HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 1% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 15B shows an exemplary FITC-H histogram of FLOWPRA™ beads pooled Donor PPP gated on Class II HLA following tangential flow filtration (TFF) to about 1% (by absorbance at 280 nm) retained plasma protein.
  • FIG. 16 shows exemplary flow cytometry data of thrombosomes unstained (dark data points) or stained (light data points) with an anti-CD-41 antibody.
  • FIG. 17 shows an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes incubated with annexin V with (light data points) and without (dark data points) calcium.
  • FIG. 18 shows an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes incubated with an anti-CD62 antibody (light data points) or with an isotype control (dark data points).
  • FIG. 19 shows a plot of thrombin peak height for thrombosomes in the presence of PRP Reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids (solid line and long dashes) and control cephalin (dots).
  • FIG. 20 is an exemplary histogram comparison of low-plasma thrombosomes unstained (black) or stained with an isotype control antibody (dark gray) or a FITC-labeled 9F9 antibody (light gray), and a table showing the mean fluorescence intensity for two replicates.
  • FIG. 21 is an exemplary histogram comparison of low-plasma thrombosomes unstained (black) or stained with an anti-PAC-1 antibody (light gray), and a table showing the mean fluorescence intensity for two replicates.
  • FIG. 22A is a plot of the mean fluorescence intensity of thrombosomes (1×106 cells) treated with various concentrations of a labeled anti-CD47 antibody or an isotype control.
  • FIG. 22B is an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes that were unstained (black), stained with an isotype control antibody (dark gray), or stained with an anti-CD47 antibody (light gray).
  • FIG. 22C is a plot of the mean fluorescence intensity of thrombosomes (250,000 cells) treated with various concentrations of a labeled anti-CD47 antibody or an isotype control.
  • FIG. 22D is an exemplary histogram of thrombosomes that were unstained (black), stained with an isotype control antibody (dark gray), or stained with an anti-CD47 antibody (light gray).
  • FIG. 23A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch J) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by dynamic light scattering (DLS).
  • FIG. 23B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch K) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 23C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch L) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 24A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch D) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 24B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch E) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 24C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in human in-date stored platelets (Batch F) and platelet derivatives (pre-lyophilization) derived therefrom as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 25A is an exemplary schematic of a pathogen reduction system.
  • FIG. 25B is a plot of the weight of a reaction vessel over time.
  • FIG. 25C is a plot of pressure in a reaction vessel over time.
  • FIG. 26A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in rehydrated thrombosomes that were (Batch N) or were not (Batch M) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 26B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in rehydrated thrombosomes that were (Batch K) or were not (Batch J) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 27A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs that were (Batch N) or were not (Batch M) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 27B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch M) that were not treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 27C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch N) that were treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 28A is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs that were (Batch K) or were not (Batch J) treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 28B is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch J) that were not treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 28C is a plot of the percent occupancy of particles of different radii in hIDSPs and thrombosomes derived therefrom (Batch K) that were treated to remove pathogens, as determined by DLS.
  • FIG. 29A is a bar plot of the transmittance of platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof using light transmission aggregometry.
  • FIG. 29B is a bar plot of the platelet (and/or thrombosome) count of platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof following aggregation.
  • FIG. 29C is a bar plot of the transmittance of platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof in light transmission aggregometry.
  • FIG. 30 is a bar plot of the transmittance of thrombin-activated platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof in the presence and absence of GPRP.
  • FIG. 31 is a bar plot of the percent aggregation of PMA-activated platelets, thrombosomes, and combinations thereof in the presence and absence of RGDS.
  • FIG. 32A shows SEM of activated platelets (scale bar=2 μm).
  • FIG. 32B shows SEM of activated platelets (scale bar=1 μm).
  • FIG. 32C shows SEM of rehydrated human thrombosomes (scale bar=2 μm).
  • FIG. 32D shows SEM of rehydrated human thrombosomes (scale bar=1 μm).
  • FIG. 33A is a plot of thrombosome adhesion under shear in whole blood.
  • FIG. 33B is a plot of thrombosome adhesion under shear in plasma.
  • FIG. 33C shows formation of fibrin in a microcapillary channel in the absence of GPRP.
  • FIG. 33D shows a lack of formation of fibrin in a microcapillary channel in the presence of GPRP.
  • FIG. 33E is a plot of the effect of GPRP on thrombosome adhesion under shear in plasma.
  • As used herein and in the appended claims, the term “platelet” can include whole platelets, fragmented platelets, and platelet derivatives.
  • As used herein and in the appended claims, the singular forms “a”, “an”, and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to “a platelet” includes a plurality of such platelets. Furthermore, the use of terms that can be described using equivalent terms include the use of those equivalent terms. Thus, for example, the use of the term “subject” is to be understood to include the terms “patient”, “individual” and other terms used in the art to indicate one who is subject to a treatment.
  • Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which the term belongs. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present disclosure, the preferred methods and materials are now described. All publications mentioned herein are incorporated herein by reference to disclose and describe the methods and/or materials in connection with which the publications are cited. The present disclosure is controlling to the extent it conflicts with any incorporated publication.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • It is to be understood that the terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only, and is not intended to be limiting. Further, where a range of values is disclosed, the skilled artisan will understand that all other specific values within the disclosed range are inherently disclosed by these values and the ranges they represent without the need to disclose each specific value or range herein. For example, a disclosed range of 1-10 includes 1-9, 1-5, 2-10, 3.1-6, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and so forth. In addition, each disclosed range includes up to 5% lower for the lower value of the range and up to 5% higher for the higher value of the range. For example, a disclosed range of 4-10 includes 3.8-10.5. This concept is captured in this document by the term “about”.
  • Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which the term belongs. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present disclosure, the preferred methods and materials are now described. All publications mentioned herein are incorporated herein by reference to disclose and describe the methods and/or materials in connection with which the publications are cited. The present disclosure is controlling to the extent it conflicts with any incorporated publication.
  • As used herein and in the appended claims, the term “platelet” can include whole platelets, fragmented platelets, platelet derivatives, or thrombosomes. “Platelets” within the above definition may include, for example, platelets in whole blood, platelets in plasma, platelets in buffer optionally supplemented with select plasma proteins, cold stored platelets, dried platelets, cryopreserved platelets, thawed cryopreserved platelets, rehydrated dried platelets, rehydrated cryopreserved platelets, lyopreserved platelets, thawed lyopreserved platelets, or rehydrated lyopreserved platelets. “Platelets” may be “platelets” of mammals, such as of humans, or such as of non-human mammals.
  • As used herein, “thrombosomes” (sometimes also called Tsomes) are platelet derivatives that have been treated with a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein) and lyopreserved (such as freeze-dried). In some cases, thrombosomes can be prepared from pooled platelets. Thrombosomes can have a shelf life of 2-3 years in dry form at ambient temperature and can be rehydrated with sterile water within minutes for immediate infusion. One example of thrombosomes are THROMBOSOMES®, which are in clinical trials for the treatment of acute hemorrhage in thrombocytopenic patients.
  • Transfusion-related acute lung injury (TRALI) is a condition believed to be caused by the presence of antibodies (e.g., Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA), Human Neutrophil Antigen (HNA), or granulocyte antibodies) in a transfused blood product, which can react with antigens in a transfusion recipient.
  • The use of plasma-based blood products from donors considered to be high-risk or who test positive for Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA) Class I, Class II, and neutrophil-specific antibodies are banned from use in transfusion or production of human-derived platelet products (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) and are therefore omitted from the donor pool.
  • The use of tangential flow filtration (TFF) or multi-pass centrifugation can reduce the amount of antibody in a blood product, for example, to limits not detectable by current, FDA-approved, testing methods. In some cases, reduction of certain plasma components (e.g., HLA antibodies) can allow for this donor population to be accepted for production of blood products (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)). In some embodiments described herein, a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • Thrombosomes or cryopreserved platelet production can be limited by the availability of licensed apheresis collections performed at blood donor centers around the United States. Competition for these products can be fierce, and distribution for blood product manufacturing needs is usually prioritized below the needs of patient care. Blood product manufacturing (e.g., scale-up), could be aided by apheresis collections from otherwise deferred donors. One way this could be accomplished is by reducing free antibody levels in donor plasma to meet current, FDA approved, testing thresholds by utilizing tangential flow filtration (TFF) or centrifugation and plasma removal. Centrifugation of the raw materials (e.g., donor plasma), while typically more time consuming than TFF, can have a similar effect on the raw material. In some cases, removal of the donor plasma and replacement with buffer can allow the inventors to manufacture and characterize a final product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) with a reduced protein (e.g., antibody (e.g., HLA antibody or HNA antibody)) content (e.g., as measured by absorbance at 280 nm). Such a product can increase the safety for a recipient of the product by reducing the transfusion related cause for TRALI.
  • In some embodiments, the materials and methods provided herein can allow previously deferred donors (such as those who screen positive for HLA antibodies or whose donor history presents a risk for positive HLA) to be allowed into the donor pool of raw materials used to manufacture blood products (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)). In some embodiments described herein, a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium. Additionally, a reduction in HLA antibodies from the raw materials (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., platelets or pooled platelets)) can allow for a final product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) to be labeled as HLA-reduced, increasing the safety of a product for a recipient.
  • In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have no detectable level of HLA antibodies. In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have no detectable level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies. In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have no detectable level of HLA Class I antibodies. In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have no detectable level of HLA Class II antibodies. In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have no detectable level of HNA antibodies. In some embodiments, detection of antibodies can be carried out using a regulatory agency approved (e.g., FDA cleared) assay. A regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay. In some embodiments, a regulatory agency approved test can be the LAB SCREEN™ Mixed by One Lambda. In some implementations, a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSION™ software. In some embodiments described herein, a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have a level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies below a reference level. In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have a level of HLA Class I antibodies below a reference level. In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have a level of HLA Class II antibodies below a reference level. In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can have a level of HNA antibodies below a reference level. A reference level can be any appropriate reference level. In some embodiments described herein, a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium.
  • In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein test negative for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can test negative for HLA Class I antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can test negative for HLA Class II antibodies a in regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., a composition comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes)) as provided herein can test negative for HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments described herein, a blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium. A regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay. In some embodiments, a regulatory agency approved test can be the LAB SCREEN™ Mixed by One Lambda. In some implementations, a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSION™ software.
  • Provided herein are compositions comprising platelets and/or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) and an aqueous medium. In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can include a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies below a reference level. In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of HLA Class I antibodies below a reference level. In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of HLA Class II antibodies below a reference level. In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can have a level of HNA antibodies below a reference level. A reference level can be any appropriate reference level. In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for HLA Class I antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for HLA Class II antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium as provided herein can test negative for HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). A regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay. In some embodiments, a regulatory agency approved test can be the LABSCREEN™ Mixed by One Lambda. In some implementations, a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSION™ software.
  • In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a reduced amount of residual plasma compared to donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma) can be a percentage of residual plasma (e.g., less than or equal to about 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1% of residual plasma). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a reduced amount of residual plasma compared to donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma) can be a percentage range of residual plasma (e.g., about 5% to about 50%, about 5% to about 40%, about 5% to about 30%, about 5% to about 20%, about 5% to about 15%, about 5% to about 10%, about 10% to about 20%, about 7% to about 15%, about 7% to about 10%, about 8% to about 15%, about 8% to about 10%, about 0.1% to about 5%, about 0.1% to about 3%, about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.5% to about 3%, about 0.5% to about 1%, or about 1% to about 3% of residual plasma). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a protein concentration less than or equal to about 50% (e.g., less than or equal to about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a protein concentration of about 5% to about 50% (e.g., about 5% to about 40%, about 5% to about 30%, about 5% to about 20%, about 5% to about 15%, about 5% to about 10%, about 10% to about 20%, about 7% to about 15%, about 7% to about 10%, about 8% to about 15%, or about 8% to about 10%) of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a protein concentration of about 0.1% to about 5% (e.g., about 0.1% to about 3%, about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.5% to about 3%, about 0.5% to about 1%, about 1% to about 2%, or about 1% to about 3%) of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma). A protein concentration can be measured by any appropriate method. In some embodiments, a protein concentration can be measured by absorbance at 280 nm (A280). In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have an A280 that is less that is less than 1.70 AU (e.g., less than 1.66, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, 1.3, 1.2, 1.1, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 AU) with a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a HLA Class I antibody concentration less than about 70% (e.g., less than about 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the HLA Class I antibody concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma). A HLA Class I antibody concentration can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a HLA Class II antibody concentration less than about 50% (e.g., less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the HLA Class II antibody concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma). A HLA Class II antibody concentration can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • In some embodiments, an aqueous medium can have a HNA antibody concentration less than about 50% (e.g., less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the HNA antibody concentration of donor apheresis plasma (e.g., single-donor apheresis plasma or pooled donor apheresis plasma). A HNA antibody concentration can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can have a platelet count of at least 106 (e.g., at least 5×106, 107, 5×107, 108, 5×108, 109, 5×109, or 1010). In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can have a platelet count of at least about 200×103 platelets/μL (e.g., at least about 300×103, 400×103, 500×103, 750×103, 1000×103, 1500×103, 2000×103, or 2500×103 platelets/μL). In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can have a platelet count of at least about 2000×103 platelets/μL (e.g., at least about 2050×103, 2100×103, 2150×103, 2200×103, 2250×103, 2300×103, 2350×103, 2400×103, 2450×103, or 2500×103 platelets/μL). In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can have a platelet count less than or equal to 1000×104 platelets/μL.
  • In some embodiments, a composition as provided herein can include erythrocytes. In some embodiments, a composition as provided herein can have an erythrocyte count of less than about 1010 (e.g., less than 5×109, 109, 5×108, 108, 5×107, 107, 5×106, or 106). In some embodiments, the erythrocyte count can be less than 0.2×106/μL (e.g., less than 0.1×106/μL, 0.5×105/μL, or 0.1×105/μL).
  • In some cases, flow cytometry can be used to evaluate compositions as provided herein. In some embodiments, an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%). In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%). In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%). In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • In some embodiments, an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%). In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%). In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%). In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for an aqueous medium by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 10% (e.g., less than 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%).
  • In some embodiments, a composition provided herein can include one or more additional components. In some embodiments, a composition provided herein can include a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein). In some embodiments, the composition can include a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent. A buffering agent can be any appropriate buffering agent. In some embodiments, a buffering agent can be HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid). A base can be any appropriate base. In some embodiments, a base can be sodium bicarbonate. A loading agent can be any appropriate loading agent. In some embodiments, a loading agent can be a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, a loading agent can be selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose. In some embodiments, a loading agent can be trehalose. In some embodiments, a polysaccharide can be polysucrose. A salt can be any appropriate salt. In some embodiments, a salt can be sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof. An organic solvent can be any appropriate organic solvent. In some embodiments, an organic solvent can be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • A preparation agent can include any appropriate components. In some embodiments, the preparation agent may comprise a liquid medium. In some embodiments the preparation agent may comprise one or more salts selected from phosphate salts, sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts, and any other salt that can be found in blood or blood products, or that is known to be useful in drying platelets, or any combination of two or more of these.
  • In some embodiments, the preparation agent comprises one or more salts, such as phosphate salts, sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts, and any other salt that can be found in blood or blood products. Exemplary salts include sodium chloride (NaCl), potassium chloride (KCl), and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes from about 0.5 mM to about 100 mM of the one or more salts. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes from about 0.5 mM to about 100 mM (e.g., about 0.5 to about 2 mM, about 2 mM to about 90 mM, about 2 mM to about 6 mM, about 50 mM to about 100 mM, about 60 mM to about 90 mM, about 70 to about 85 mM) of the one or more salts. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes about 5 mM, about 75 mM, or about 80 mM of the one or more salts. In some embodiments, the preparation agent comprises one or more salts selected from calcium salts, magnesium salts, and a combination of the two, in a concentration of about 0.5 mM to about 2 mM.
  • Preferably, these salts are present in the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives, such as freeze-dried platelets, at an amount that is about the same as is found in whole blood.
  • In some embodiments, the preparation agent further comprises a carrier protein. In some embodiments, the carrier protein comprises human serum albumin, bovine serum albumin, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the carrier protein is present in an amount of about 0.05% to about 1.0% (w/v).
  • The preparation agent may be any buffer that is non-toxic to the platelets and provides adequate buffering capacity to the solution at the temperatures at which the solution will be exposed during the process provided herein. Thus, the buffer may comprise any of the known biologically compatible buffers available commercially, such as phosphate buffers, such as phosphate buffered saline (PBS), bicarbonate/carbonic acid, such as sodium-bicarbonate buffer, N-2-hydroxyethylpiperazine-N′-2-ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), and tris-based buffers, such as tris-buffered saline (TB S). Likewise, it may comprise one or more of the following buffers: propane-1,2,3-tricarboxylic (tricarballylic); benzenepentacarboxylic; maleic; 2,2-dimethylsuccinic; EDTA; 3,3-dimethylglutaric; bis(2-hydroxyethyl)imino-tris(hydroxymethyl)-methane (BIS-TRIS); benzenehexacarboxylic (mellitic); N-(2-acetamido)imino-diacetic acid (ADA); butane-1,2,3,4-tetracarboxylic; pyrophosphoric; 1,1-cyclopentanediacetic (3,3 tetramethylene-glutaric acid); piperazine-1,4-bis-(2-ethanesulfonic acid) (PIPES); N-(2-acetamido)-2-amnoethanesulfonic acid (ACES); 1,1-cyclohexanediacetic; 3,6-endomethylene-1,2,3,6-tetrahydrophthalic acid (EMTA; ENDCA); imidazole; 2-(aminoethyl)trimethylammonium chloride (CHOLAMINE); N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES); 2-methylpropane-1,2,3-triscarboxylic (beta-methyltricarballylic); 2-(N-morpholino)propane-sulfonic acid (MOPS); phosphoric; and N-tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-2-amminoethane sulfonic acid (TES). In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes one or more buffers, e.g., N-2-hydroxyethylpiperazine-N′-2-ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), or sodium-bicarbonate (NaHCO3). In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes from about 5 to about 100 mM of the one or more buffers. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes from about 5 to about 50 mM (e.g., from about 5 mM to about 40 mM, from about 8 mM to about 30 mM, about 10 mM to about 25 mM) about of the one or more buffers. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes about 10 mM, about 20 mM, about 25 mM, or about 30 mM of the one or more buffers.
  • In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes one or more saccharides, such as monosaccharides and disaccharides, including sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, dextrose, and xylose. In some embodiments, the saccharide is a monosaccharide. In some embodiments, the saccharide is a disaccharide. In some embodiments, the saccharide is a monosaccharide, a disaccharide, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the saccharide is a non-reducing disaccharide. In some embodiments, the saccharide is sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, or xylose. In some embodiments, the saccharide comprises trehalose. In some embodiments, the preparation agent comprises a starch. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes poly sucrose, a polymer of sucrose and epichlorohydrin. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes from about 10 mM to about 1,000 mM of the one or more saccharides. In some embodiments, the preparation agent includes from about 50 to about 500 mM of the one or more saccharides. In some embodiments, one or more saccharides is present in an amount of from 10 mM 10 to 500 mM. In some embodiments, one or more saccharides is present in an amount of from 50 mM to 200 mM. In some embodiments, one or more saccharides is present in an amount from 100 mM to 150 mM. In some embodiments, the one or more saccharides are the lyophilizing agent; for example, in some embodiments, the lyophilizing agent comprises trehalose, polysucrose, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives, (e.g., thrombosomes), may comprise one or more of water or a saline solution. In some embodiments the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives, such as freeze-dried platelets, may comprise DMSO.
  • In some embodiments, the preparation agent comprises an organic solvent, such as an alcohol (e.g., ethanol). In such a preparation agent, the amount of solvent can range from 0.1% to 5.0% (v/v). In some embodiments, the organic solvent can range from about 0.1% (v/v) to about 5.0% (v/v), such as from about 0.3% (v/v) to about 3.0% (v/v), or from about 0.5% (v/v) to about 2% (v/v).
  • In some embodiments, suitable organic solvents include, but are not limited to alcohols, esters, ketones, ethers, halogenated solvents, hydrocarbons, nitriles, glycols, alkyl nitrates, water or mixtures thereof. In some embodiments, suitable organic solvents includes, but are not limited to methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, acetic acid, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, tetrahydrofuran, isopropyl ether (IPE), tert-butyl methyl ether, dioxane (e.g., 1,4-dioxane), acetonitrile, propionitrile, methylene chloride, chloroform, toluene, anisole, cyclohexane, hexane, heptane, ethylene glycol, nitromethane, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the organic solvent comprises ethanol, DMSO, or a combination thereof. The presence of organic solvents, such as ethanol, can be beneficial in the processing of platelets, platelet derivatives, or thrombosomes (e.g., freeze-dried platelet derivatives).
  • In some embodiments the preparation agent does not include an organic solvent. In some embodiments, the preparation agent comprises an organic solvent. In some embodiments the preparation agent comprises DMSO.
  • A preparation agent can have any appropriate pH. For example, in some embodiments, a preparation agent can have a pH of about 6.0 to about 7.4 (e.g., about 6.5 to about 6.9, or about 6.6 to about 6.8).
  • In some embodiments, one or more other components may be combined with in the platelets (e.g., as part of a preparation agent). Exemplary components may include Prostaglandin E1 or Prostacyclin and or EDTA/EGTA to prevent platelet aggregation and activation.
  • In some embodiments, a preparation agent can be Buffer A, as shown in Example 1. In some embodiments, a preparation agent can comprise Buffer A, as shown in Example 1, wherein one or more components (e.g., ethanol) is present in an amount up to three times the amount shown in Example 1. Non-limiting examples of preparation agent compositions that may be used are shown in Tables P1-P6.
  • TABLE P1
    Table P1. A preparation agent that can be used
    Buffer
    Concentration (mM
    Component unless otherwise specified)
    NaCl 75.0
    KCl 4.8
    HEPES 9.5
    NaHCO3 12.0
    Dextrose 3
    Trehalose 100
    Ethanol 1% (v/v)
  • TABLE P2
    Table P2. A preparation agent that can be used
    Buffer
    Concentration (mM
    Component unless otherwise specified)
    NaCl 75.0
    KCl 4.8
    HEPES 9.5
    NaHCO3 12.0
    Dextrose 3
    Trehalose 100
  • TABLE P3
    Table P3. A preparation agent that can be used.
    Buffer A1 (pH 6.5)
    Concentration (mM
    Component unless specified otherwise)
    CaCl2 1.8
    MgCl2 1.1
    KCl 2.7
    NaCl 137
    NaH2PO4 0.4
    HEPES 10
    D-glucose 5.6
  • TABLE P4
    Table P4. Buffer B can be used when incubating platelets,
    e.g., for flow cytometry. Such an incubation can be done at room
    temperature in the dark. Albumin is an optional component of Buffer B.
    Buffer B
    Concentration (mM unless
    Component otherwise specified)
    Buffer and Salts Table P5 (below)
    BSA 0.35%
    Dextrose 5
    pH 7.4
  • TABLE P5
    Table P5 shows the concentrations of HEPES and salts in Buffer B.
    The pH can be adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH.
    Albumin is an optional component of Buffer B.
    Concentration of HEPES and of Salts in Buffer B
    Concentration (mM
    Component unless otherwise specified)
    HEPES 25
    NaCl 119
    KCl 5
    CaCl 2 2
    MgCl 2 2
    glucose 6 g/l
  • Table P5 shows the concentrations of HEPES and salts in Buffer B. The pH can be adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH. Albumin is an optional component of Buffer B.
  • TABLE P6
    Table P6 is another exemplary preparation agent.
    Tyrode's HEPES Buffer (plus PGE1)
    Component Concentration (mM)
    CaCl2 1.8
    MgCl2 1.1
    KCl 2.7
    NaCl 137
    NaH2PO4 0.4
    HEPES 10
    D-glucose 5.6
    pH 6.5
    Prostaglandin E1 (PGE1) 1 μg/ml
  • In some embodiments, rehydrating the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives comprises adding to the platelets an aqueous liquid. In some embodiments, the aqueous liquid is water. In some embodiments, the aqueous liquid is an aqueous solution (e.g., a buffer). In some embodiments, the aqueous liquid is a saline solution. In some embodiments, the aqueous liquid is a suspension.
  • In some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) have less than about 10%, such as less than about 8%, such as less than about 6%, such as less than about 4%, such as less than about 2%, such as less than about 0.5% crosslinking of platelet membranes via proteins and/or lipids present on the membranes. In some embodiments, the rehydrated platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), have less than about 10%, such as less than about 8%, such as less than about 6%, such as less than about 4%, such as less than about 2%, such as less than about 0.5% crosslinking of platelet membranes via proteins and/or lipids present on the membranes.
  • In some embodiments, the platelets or pooled platelets may be acidified to a pH of about 6.0 to about 7.4 prior to TFF or being diluted with the preparation agent. In some embodiments, the method comprises acidifying the platelets to a pH of about 6.5 to about 6.9. In some embodiments, the method comprises acidifying the platelets to a pH of about 6.6 to about 6.8. In some embodiments, the acidifying comprises adding to the pooled platelets a solution comprising Acid Citrate Dextrose (ACD).
  • In some embodiments, the platelets are isolated prior to the TFF or being diluted with the preparation agent. In some embodiments, the method further comprises isolating platelets by using centrifugation. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs at a relative centrifugal force (RCF) of about 1000×g to about 2000×g. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs at relative centrifugal force (RCF) of about 1300×g to about 1800×g. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs at relative centrifugal force (RCF) of about 1500×g. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs for about 1 minute to about 60 minutes. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs for about 10 minutes to about 30 minutes. In some embodiments, the centrifugation occurs for about 30 minutes.
  • In some embodiments, platelets are isolated, for example in a liquid medium, prior to treating a subject.
  • In some embodiments, platelets are donor-derived platelets. In some embodiments, platelets are obtained by a process that comprises an apheresis step. In some embodiments, platelets are pooled platelets.
  • In some embodiments, platelets are pooled from a plurality of donors. Such platelets pooled from a plurality of donors may be also referred herein to as pooled platelets. In some embodiments, the donors are more than 5, such as more than 10, such as more than 20, such as more than 50, such as up to about 100 donors. In some embodiments, the donors are from about 5 to about 100, such as from about 10 to about 50, such as from about 20 to about 40, such as from about 25 to about 35. Pooled platelets can be used to make any of the compositions described herein.
  • In some embodiments, platelets are derived in vitro. In some embodiments, platelets are derived or prepared in a culture. In some embodiments, preparing the platelets comprises deriving or growing the platelets from a culture of megakaryocytes. In some embodiments, preparing the platelets comprises deriving or growing the platelets (or megakaryocytes) from a culture of human pluripotent stem cells (PSCs), including embryonic stem cells (ESCs) and/or induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs).
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) are prepared prior to treating a subject as described herein. In some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) are lyophilized. In some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) are cryopreserved. For example, in some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives can be cryopreserved in plasma and DMSO (e.g., 3-9% DMSO (e.g., 6% DMSO)). In some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives are cryopreserved as described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2020/0046771 A1, published on Feb. 13, 2020, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • In some embodiments, platelets (e.g., apheresis platelet, platelets isolated from whole blood, pooled platelets, or a combination thereof) form a suspension in a preparation agent comprising a liquid medium at a concentration from 10,000 platelets/μL to 10,000,000 platelets/μL, such as 50,000 platelets/μL to 2,000,000 platelets/μL, such as 100,000 platelets/μL to 500,000 platelets/μL, such as 150,000 platelets/μL to 300,000 platelets/μL, such as 200,000 platelets/μL.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises drying the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). In some embodiments, the drying step comprises lyophilizing the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). In some embodiments, the drying step comprises freeze-drying the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). In some embodiments, the method further comprises rehydrating the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) obtained from the drying step.
  • In some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) are cold stored, cryopreserved, or lyophilized (e.g., to produce thrombosomes) prior to use in therapy or in functional assays.
  • Any known technique for drying platelets can be used in accordance with the present disclosure, as long as the technique can achieve a final residual moisture content of less than 5%. Preferably, the technique achieves a final residual moisture content of less than 2%, such as 1%, 0.5%, or 0.1%. Non-limiting examples of suitable techniques are freeze-drying (lyophilization) and spray-drying. A suitable lyophilization method is presented in Table LA. Additional exemplary lyophilization methods can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,811,558, 8,486,617, and 8,097,403. An exemplary spray-drying method includes: combining nitrogen, as a drying gas, with a preparation agent according to the present disclosure, then introducing the mixture into GEA Mobile Minor spray dryer from GEA Processing Engineering, Inc. (Columbia MD, USA), which has a Two-Fluid Nozzle configuration, spray drying the mixture at an inlet temperature in the range of 150° C. to 190° C., an outlet temperature in the range of 65° C. to 100° C., an atomic rate in the range of 0.5 to 2.0 bars, an atomic rate in the range of 5 to 13 kg/hr, a nitrogen use in the range of 60 to 100 kg/hr, and a run time of 10 to 35 minutes. The final step in spray drying is preferentially collecting the dried mixture. The dried composition in some embodiments is stable for at least six months at temperatures that range from −20° C. or lower to 90° C. or higher.
  • TABLE LA
    Exemplary Lyophilization Protocol
    Step Temp. Set Type Duration Pressure Set
    Freezing Step F1 −50° C. Ramp Var N/A
    F2 −50° C. Hold 3 Hrs N/A
    Vacuum Pulldown F3 −50° Hold Var N/A
    Primary Dry P1 −40° Hold 1.5 Hrs 0 mT
    P2 −35° Ramp 2 Hrs 0 mT
    P3 −25° Ramp 2 Hrs 0 mT
    P4 −17° C. Ramp 2 Hrs 0 mT
    P5
    C. Ramp 1.5 Hrs 0 mT
    P6 27° C. Ramp 1.5 Hrs 0 mT
    P7 27° C. Hold 16 Hrs 0 mT
    Secondary Dry Sl 27° C. Hold >8 Hrs 0 mT
  • In some embodiments, the step of drying the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) that are obtained as disclosed herein, such as the step of freeze-drying the platelets and/or platelet derivatives that are obtained as disclosed herein, comprises incubating the platelet and/or platelet derivatives with a lyophilizing agent (e.g., a non-reducing disaccharide). Accordingly, in some embodiments, the methods for preparing platelets and/or platelet derivatives further comprises incubating the platelets with a lyophilizing agent. In some embodiments the lyophilizing agent is a saccharide. In some embodiments the saccharide is a disaccharide, such as a non-reducing disaccharide.
  • In some embodiments, the platelets and/or platelet derivatives are incubated with a lyophilizing agent for a sufficient amount of time and at a suitable temperature to incubate the platelets with the lyophilizing agent. Non-limiting examples of suitable lyophilizing agents are saccharides, such as monosaccharides and disaccharides, including sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, and xylose. In some embodiments, non-limiting examples of lyophilizing agents include serum albumin, dextran, polyvinyl pyrrolidone (PVP), starch, and hydroxyethyl starch (HES). In some embodiments, exemplary lyophilizing agents can include a high molecular weight polymer. By “high molecular weight” it means a polymer having an average molecular weight of about or above 70 kDa and up to 1,000,000 kDa. Non-limiting examples are polymers of sucrose and epichlorohydrin (e.g., polysucrose). In some embodiments, the lyophilizing agent is polysucrose. Although any amount of high molecular weight polymer can be used as a lyophilizing agent, it is preferred that an amount be used that achieves a final concentration of about 3% to 10% (w/v), such as 3% to 7%, for example 6%.
  • An exemplary saccharide for use in the compositions disclosed herein is trehalose. Regardless of the identity of the saccharide, it can be present in the composition in any suitable amount. For example, it can be present in an amount of 1 mM to 1 M. In embodiments, it is present in an amount of from 10 mM 10 to 500 mM. In some embodiments, it is present in an amount of from 20 mM to 200 mM. In embodiments, it is present in an amount from 40 mM to 100 mM. In various embodiments, the saccharide is present in different specific concentrations within the ranges recited above, and one of skill in the art can immediately understand the various concentrations without the need to specifically recite each herein. Where more than one saccharide is present in the composition, each saccharide can be present in an amount according to the ranges and particular concentrations recited above.
  • In some cases, preparation of thrombosomes further comprises one or more of the procedures described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,486,617 (such as, e.g., Examples 1-5) and U.S. Pat. No. 8,097,403 (such as, e.g., Examples 1-3), incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. In some cases, a starting material (e.g., one or more donor platelet units) are initially pooled into a common vessel. In some embodiments, a starting material can comprise one or more donor platelet units. In some embodiments, a starting material can comprise donor plasma. The starting material may or may not be acidified with an anti-coagulation buffer (i.e. ACD-A) before centrifugation. Plasma can be aspirated off of the platelet pellet after centrifugation. Cell compatible buffer containing cryoprotectants (e.g., a loading buffer, which can be similar to or the same as a preparation agent) can be added to the platelet pellet before resuspending the cells into suspension. Platelets may or may not be diluted to a pre-determined concentration (e.g., 2200 k/ul to 2800 k/ul) with buffer if desired. Platelets in buffer may be incubated between 0 minutes and 240 minutes at an incubation temperature from 18° C. to 37° C. A lyoprotectant bulking agent (e.g., polysucrose) can be added to the platelets in buffer to achieve a final bulking agent concentration from 1% to 10% w/v (with preference at 6% w/v). The centrifuged processed platelets can then be filled into vials, lyophilized and thermally treated.
  • In some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) have a particle size (e.g., diameter, max dimension) of at least about 0.5 μm (e.g., at least about at least about 0.6 μm, at least about 0.7 μm, at least about 0.8 μm, at least about 0.9 μm, at least about 1.0 μm, at least about 1.2 μm, at least about 1.5 μm, at least about 2.0 μm, at least about 2.5 μm, or at least about 5.0 μm). In some embodiments, the particle size is less than about 5.0 μm (e.g., less than about 2.5 μm, less than about 2.0 μm, less than about 1.5 μm, less than about 1.0 μm, less than about 0.9 μm, less than about 0.8 μm, less than about 0.7 μm, less than about 0.6 μm, less than about 0.5 μm, less than about 0.4 μm, or less than about 0.3 μm). In some embodiments, the particle size is from about 0.5 μm to about 5.0 μm (e.g., from about 0.5 μm to about 4.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 2.5 μm, from about 0.6 μm to about 2.0 μm, from about 0.7 μm to about 1.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 0.9 μm, or from about 0.6 μm to about 0.8 μm).
  • In some embodiments, at least 50% (e.g., at least about 55%, at least about 60%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, at least about 80%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%, at least about 95%, or at least about 99%) of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), have a particle size in the range of about 0.5 μm to about 5.0 μm (e.g., from about 0.5 μm to about 4.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 2.5 μm, from about 0.6 μm to about 2.0 μm, from about 0.7 μm to about 1.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 0.9 μm, or from about 0.6 μm to about 0.8 μm). In some embodiments, at most 99% (e.g., at most about 95%, at most about 80%, at most about 75%, at most about 70%, at most about 65%, at most about 60%, at most about 55%, or at most about 50%) of the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), are in the range of about 0.5 μm to about 5.0 μm (e.g., from about 0.5 μm to about 4.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 2.5 μm, from about 0.6 μm to about 2.0 μm, from about 0.7 μm to about 1.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 0.9 μm, or from about 0.6 μm to about 0.8 μm). In some embodiments, about 50% to about 99% (e.g., about 55% to about 95%, about 60% to about 90%, about 65% to about 85, about 70% to about 80%) of the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) are in the range of about 0.5 μm to about 5.0 μm (e.g., from about 0.5 μm to about 4.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 2.5 μm, from about 0.6 μm to about 2.0 μm, from about 0.7 μm to about 1.0 μm, from about 0.5 μm to about 0.9 μm, or from about 0.6 μm to about 0.8 μm).
  • In some cases, a microparticle can be a particle having a particle size (e.g., diameter, max dimension) of less than about 0.5 μm (less than about 0.45 μm or 0.4 μm) In some cases, a microparticle can be a particle having a particle size of about 0.01 μm to about 0.5 μm (e.g., about 0.02 μm to about 0.5 μm).
  • Compositions comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared according to methods described herein, can have a microparticle content that contributes to less than about 5.0% (e.g., less than about 4.5%, 4.0%, 3.5%, 3.0%, 2.5%, 2.0%, 1.5%, 1.0%, or 0.5%) of the total scattering intensity of all particles from about 1 nm to about 60,000 nm in radius in the composition. As used herein, a content of microparticles “by scattering intensity” refers to the microparticle content based on the scattering intensity of all particles from about 1 nm to about 60,000 nm in radius in the composition. The microparticle content can be measured by any appropriate method, for example, by dynamic light scattering (DLS). In some cases, the viscosity of a sample used for DLS can be at about 1.060 cP (or adjusted to be so), as this is the approximate viscosity of plasma.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can have cell surface markers. The presence of cell surface markers can be determined using any appropriate method. In some embodiments, the presence of cell surface markers can be determined using binding proteins (e.g., antibodies) specific for one or more cell surface markers and flow cytometry (e.g., as a percent positivity, e.g., using approximately 2.7×105 thrombosomes/μL; and about 4.8 μL of an anti-CD41 antibody, about 3.3 μL of an anti-CD42 antibody, about 1.3 μL of annexin V, or about 2.4 μL of an anti-CD62 antibody). Non-limiting examples of cell-surface markers include CD41 (also called glycoprotein IIb or GPIIb, which can be assayed using e.g., an anti-CD41 antibody), CD42 (which can be assayed using, e.g., an anti-CD42 antibody), CD62 (also called CD62P or P-selectin, which can be assayed using, e.g., an anti-CD62 antibody), phosphatidylserine (which can be assayed using, e.g., annexin V (AV)), and CD47 (which is used in self-recognition; absence of this marker, in some cases, can lead to phagocytosis). The percent positivity of any cell surface marker can be any appropriate percent positivity. For example, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared by methods described herein, can have an average CD41 percent positivity of at least 55% (e.g., at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 67%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95%). As another example, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those described herein, can have an average CD42 percent positivity of at least 65% (e.g., at least 67%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95%). As another example, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared by methods described herein, can have an average CD62 percent positivity of at least 10% (e.g., at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 30%, at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 82%, at least 83%, at least 84%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95%). As yet another example, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared by methods described herein, can have an average annexin V positivity of at least 25% (e.g., at least 30%, at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, or at least 99%). As another example, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared by methods described herein, can have an average CD47 percent positivity of at least about 8% (e.g., at least about 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, or 55%).
  • Glycoprotein VI (GPVI) is a platelet receptor for collagen, and the binding of collagen to GVPI activates the platelet. Receptor binding can be noticeably reduced in thrombosomes compared to fresh platelets. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that the manufacturing process is blocking or destroying some copies of this receptor in thrombosomes, possibly to a reduction in collagen binding in thrombosomes relative to fresh platelets.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane. Aggregation of activated platelets is mediated by the formation of the GPIIb/IIIa complex, which can bind to fibrinogen (also called Factor 1) and form a clot. GPIIb/IIIa is a platelet fibrinogen receptor also known as CD41/CD61 complex. The GPIIb/IIIa clone PAC-1 binds to the active form of the GPIIb/IIIa. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that the presence of fibrinogen on the cell membrane may be indicative of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) capable of forming clots. Similarly without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that a lack of binding by anti-PAC1 antibodies to the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared by methods described herein, can be indicative of fibrinogen bound to the active form of GPIIb/GPIIIa, as PAC-1 binds to the same complex. In some cases, platelets or platelets derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes), such as those prepared by methods described herein, can have a greater amount of bound fibrinogen when they retain a higher amount of residual plasma.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can be capable of generating thrombin, for example, when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids. For example, in some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL) as described herein can generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 25 nM (e.g., at least 30 nM, 35 nM, 40 nM, 45 nM, 50 nM, 52 nM, 54 nM, 55 nM, 56 nM, 58 nM, 60 nM, 65 nM, 70 nM, 75 nM, or 80 nM) when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor (e.g., at 0.25 pM, 0.5 pM, 1 pM, 2 pM, 5 pM or 10 pM) and optionally phospholipids. For example, in some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL) as described herein can generate a TPH of about 25 nM to about 100 nM (e.g., about 25 nM to about 50 nM, about 25 to about 75 nM, about 50 to about 100 nM, about 75 to about 100 nM, about 35 nM to about 95 nM, about 45 to about 85 nM, about 55 to about 75 nM, or about 60 to about 70 nM) when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and (e.g., at 0.25 pM, 0.5 pM, 1 pM, 2 pM, 5 pM or 10 pM) and optionally phospholipids. In some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL) as described herein can generate a TPH of at least 25 nM (e.g., at least 30 nM, 35 nM, 40 nM, 45 nM, 50 nM, 52 nM, 54 nM, 55 nM, 56 nM, 58 nM, 60 nM, 65 nM, 70 nM, 75 nM, or 80 nM) when in the presence of PRP Reagent (cat #TS30.00 from Thrombinoscope), for example, using conditions comprising 20 μL of PRP Reagent and 80 μL of a composition comprising about 4.8×103 particles/μL of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). In some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL) as described herein can generate a TPH of about 25 nM to about 100 nM (e.g., about 25 nM to about 50 nM, about 25 to about 75 nM, about 50 to about 100 nM, about 75 to about 100 nM, about 35 nM to about 95 nM, about 45 to about 85 nM, about 55 to about 75 nM, or about 60 to about 70 nM) when in the presence of PRP Reagent (cat #TS30.00 from Thrombinoscope), for example, using conditions comprising 20 μL of PRP Reagent and 80 μL of a composition comprising about 4.8×103 particles/μL of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • Platelets or Platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can be capable of generating thrombin, for example, when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids. For example, in some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) can have a potency of at least 1.2 (e.g., at least 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, or 2.5) thrombin generation potency units (TGPU) per 106 particles. For example, in some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) can have a potency of between 1.2 and 2.5 TPGU per 106 particles (e.g., between 1.2 and 2.0, between 1.3 and 1.5, between 1.5 and 2.25, between 1.5 and 2.0, between 1.5 and 1.75, between 1.75 and 2.5, between 2.0 and 2.5, or between 2.25 and 2.5 TPGU per 106 particles). TPGU can be calculated as follows: TGPU/million particles=[TPH in nM]*[Potency Coefficient in IU/(nM)]/[0.576 million particles in the well]. Similarly, the Potency Coefficient for a sample of thrombin can be calculated as follows: Potency Coefficient=Calculated Calibrator Activity (IU)/Effective Calibrator Activity (nM). In some cases, the calibrator activity can be based on a WHO international thrombin standard.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can be capable of aggregating, as determined, for example, by using a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS®). In some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives as described herein, when at a concentration of at least 70×103 particles/μL (e.g., at least 73×103, 100×103, 150×103, 173×103, 200×103, 250×103, or 255×103 particles/μL) can result in a T-TAS occlusion time (e.g., time to reach kPa of 80) of less than 14 minutes (e.g., less than 13.5, 13, 12.5, 12, 11.5, or 11 minutes), for example, in platelet-reduced citrated whole blood. In some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives as described herein, when at a concentration of at least 70×103 particles/μL (e.g., at least 73×103, 100×103, 150×103, 173×103, 200×103, 250×103, or 255×103 particles/μL) can result in an area under the curve (AUC) of at least 1300 (e.g., at least 1380, 1400, 1500, 1600, or 1700), for example, in platelet-reduced citrated whole blood.
  • Platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can be capable of aggregating, for example, in the presence of an aggregation agonist. Non-limiting examples of aggregation agonists include thrombin and collagen. In some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can have a percent aggregation of at least 5% (e.g., at least 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 67%, 70%, 75%, 85%, 90%, or 99%) in the presence of an aggregation agonist. In some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can have a percent aggregation of about 25% to about 100% (e.g., about 25% to about 50%, about 25% to about 75%, about 50% to about 100%, about 75% to about 100%, about 40% to about 95%, about 55% to about 80%, or about 65% to about 75%) in the presence of an aggregation agonist. Percent aggregation can be determined by any appropriate method, for example, light transmission aggregometry.
  • Compositions comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can have appropriate conditions and amounts of cellular substrates and/or metabolites, such as pH, pCO2, pO2, HCO3 concentration, total carbon dioxide (TCO2), sO2, and lactate concentration. Lactate can be the products of glycolysis. Without being bound by any particular theory, a starting material can have high lactate concentration because it has been stored ex vivo, respirating and performing glycolysis, for a period of time (e.g., about 3 days) by the time of manufacturing. For example, in some cases, the pH can be about 6.0 to about 7.5 (e.g., about 6.0 to about 7.4, about 6.9 to about 7.5, or about 7.0 to about 7.3). As another example, the pCO2 can be about 10 to about 20 mmHg (e.g., about 10 to about 15 mmHg, about 15 to about 20 mmHg, or about 17 to about 19 mmHg). The pO2 can be about 140 to about 165 mmHg (e.g., about 140 to about 150 mmHg, about 150 to about 160 mmgH, or about 160 to about 165 mmHg). The HCO3 concentration can be about 4.5 to about 6.5 mmol/L (e.g., about 5.0 to about 6.0 mmol/L). The total carbon dioxide can be about 4 to about 8 mmol/L (e.g., about 5 to about 7 mmol/L). The sO2 can be at least about 98% (e.g., at least about 99%). The lactate concentration can be less than about 2.0 mmol/L (e.g., less than 1.5 mmol/L or 1.0 mmol/L). The lactate concentration can be about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L (e.g., about 0.5 to about 0.6 mmol/L, about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L, or about 0.8 to about 1.3 mmol/L).
  • Platelet or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can retain some metabolic activity, for example, as evidenced by lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) activity. In some cases, platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) as described herein can retain at least about 10% (e.g., at least about 12%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, or 45%) of the LDH activity of donor apheresis platelets. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that the addition of increasing amounts of polysucrose increases the amount of LDH activity remained (e.g., products of a preparation agent with 8% polysucrose have more retained LDH activity than products of a preparation agent with 4% polysucrose). Similarly unbound by any particular theory, it is believed that thermal treatment of a lyophilized composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) increases the amount of LDH activity retained. As another example, metabolic activity can be evidenced by retained esterase activity, such as the ability of the cells to cleave the acetate groups on carboxyfluorescein diacetate succinimidyl ester (CFDASE) to unmask a fluorophore.
  • The reduction of pathogens is generally desirable in blood products. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that some methods of pathogen reduction can cause the formation of microparticles in the treated blood product. One method of pathogen reduction involves the use of a photosensitive nucleic acid-intercalating compound to alter the nucleic acids of pathogens upon illumination with an appropriate wavelength. The INTERCEPT® system (made by Cerus) uses amotosalen, a nucleic acid intercalating compound that forms cross-links in nucleic acid upon illumination with UVA.
  • A final blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) as described herein can be prepared by any appropriate method. A final blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) as described herein can be prepared by a method as disclosed herein. In some embodiments described herein, a final blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium. In some embodiments, a final blood product can be the result of freeze-drying a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium, as described herein. In some embodiments, a final blood product can be prepared using tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone filtration)). In some embodiments, a final blood product can be prepared using centrifugation of a starting material (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone filtration)). It will be appreciated that while the methods described herein are generally described in the context of a starting material being apheresis material, other materials, such as platelets cultured in vitro, or whole blood, may be used. In some cases, platelets may be isolated from whole blood (e.g. pooled whole blood).
  • A starting material can be any appropriate starting material. In some embodiments, a starting material can have a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/mL. In some embodiments, a protein concentration can be based on the protein concentration in the plasma of whole blood. In some embodiments, a protein concentration can be based on the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma. In some embodiments, a starting material can be donor blood product (e.g., whole blood or fractionated blood). In some embodiments, the starting material can be pooled donor blood product (e.g., pooled whole blood or pooled fractionated blood). In some embodiments, a starting material can include donor apheresis plasma. In some embodiments, a starting material can be derived from donor apheresis plasma. As used herein, “donor apheresis plasma” can refer to the plasma component of apheresis material, whether or not the material contains platelets or other blood cells.
  • In some embodiments, a starting material can be donor apheresis material (e.g., donor platelets or a pool of donor platelets). In some embodiments, a starting material is positive for one or more of: HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency-approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, starting material can test positive for HLA Class I antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, a starting material can test positive for HLA Class II antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). In some embodiments, starting material can test positive for HNA antibodies in a regulatory agency approved assay (e.g., an FDA cleared assay). A regulatory agency approved assay can be any appropriate regulatory agency approved assay. In some embodiments, a regulatory agency approved test can be the LABSCREEN™ Mixed by One Lambda. In some implementations, a regulatory agency approved test can be carried out using a LUMINEX® 100/200 or a LUMINEX® XY and the HLA FUSION™ software.
  • In some embodiments, a starting material can undergo a pathogen reduction step, for example, a nucleic acid intercalating compound that forms cross-links in nucleic acid upon illumination with UVA.
  • In some embodiments, a starting material (e.g., one or more units of donor platelets) can be initially pooled into a common vessel. The starting material may or may not be initially diluted with an acidified washing buffer (e.g., a control buffer). Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that washing with an acidified washing buffer can reduce platelet activation during processing. In some cases, a starting material can undergo two general processing pathways; either washed with control buffer (e.g. using TFF) until a desired residual component is reached (e.g., a percentage of residual donor plasma) before being concentrated to a final concentration; or the starting material can be concentrated to a final concentration before being washed with control buffer (e.g., using TFF) until a desired residual component is reached (e.g., a percentage of residual donor plasma). TFF processed material can then be filled into vials, lyophilized and thermally treated.
  • In some embodiments, the method can include an initial dilution step, for example, a starting material (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)) can be diluted with a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein) to form a diluted starting material. In some cases, the initial dilution step can include dilution with a preparation agent with a mass of preparation agent equal to at least about 10% of the mass of the starting material (e.g., at least about 15%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, or 200% of the mass of the starting material. In some embodiments, an initial dilution step can be carried out using the TFF apparatus.
  • In some embodiments, the method can include concentrating (e.g., concentrating platelets) (e.g., concentrating a starting material or a diluted starting material) to form a concentrated platelet composition. For example, concentrated can include concentrating to a about 1000×103 to about 4000×103 platelets/μL (e.g., about 1000×103 to about 2000×103, about 2000×103 to about 3000×103, or about 4000×103 platelets/μL). In some embodiments, a concentration step can be carried out using the TFF apparatus.
  • The concentration of platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) can be determined by any appropriate method. For example, a counter can be used to quantitate concentration of blood cells in suspension using impedance (e.g., a Beckman Coulter AcT 10 or an AcT diff 2).
  • In some embodiments, TFF can include diafiltering (sometimes called “washing”) of a starting material, a diluted starting material, a concentrated platelet composition, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, diafiltering can include washing with at least 2 (e.g., at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more) diavolumes. In some embodiments, TFF can include buffer exchange. In some embodiments, a buffer can be used in TFF. A buffer can be any appropriate buffer. In some embodiments, the buffer can be a preparation agent (e.g., any of the preparation agents described herein). In some embodiments, the buffer can be the same preparation agent as was used for dilution. In some embodiments, the buffer can be a different preparation than was used for dilution. In some embodiments, a buffer can include a lyophilizing agent, including a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof. A buffering agent can be any appropriate buffering agent. In some embodiments, a buffering agent can be HEPES ((4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid). A base can be any appropriate base. In some embodiments, a base can be sodium bicarbonate. In some embodiments, a saccharide can be a monosaccharide. In some embodiments, a loading agent can be a saccharide. In some embodiments, a saccharide can include sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, or xylose. In some embodiments, a monosaccharide can be trehalose. In some embodiments, the loading agent can include polysucrose. A salt can be any appropriate salt. In some embodiments, a salt can be selected from the group consisting of sodium chloride (NaCl), potassium chloride (KCl), or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, a membrane with a pore size of about 0.1 μm to about 1 μm (e.g., about 0.1 μm to about 1 μm, about 0.1 μm to about 0.5 μm, about 0.2 μm to about 0.45 μm, about 0.45 μm to about 1 μm, about 0.1 μm, about 0.2 μm, about 0.45 μm, about 0.65 μm, or about 1 μm) can be used in TFF. A membrane can be made from any appropriate material. In some cases, a membrane can be a hydrophilic membrane. In some embodiments, a membrane can be a hydrophobic membrane. In some embodiments, a membrane with a nominal molecular weight cutoff (NMWCO) of at least about 100 kDa (e.g., at least about 200, 300 kDa, 500 kDa, or 1000 kDa) can be used in TFF. TFF can be performed at any appropriate temperature. In some embodiments, TFF can be performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C. (e.g., about 20° C. to about 25° C., about 20° C. to about 30° C., about 25° C. to about 30° C., about 30° C. to about 35° C., about 30° C. to about 37° C., about 25° C. to about 35° C., or about 25° C. to about 37° C.). In some embodiments, TFF can be carried out at a flow rate (e.g., a circulating flow rate) of about 100 ml/min to about 800 ml/min (e.g., about 100 to about 200 ml/min, about 100 to about 400 ml/min, about 100 to about 600 ml/min, about 200 to about 400 ml/min, about 200 to about 600 ml/min, about 200 to about 800 ml/min, about 400 to about 600 ml/min, about 400 to about 800 ml/min, about 600 to about 800 ml/min, about 100 ml/min, about 200 ml/min, about 300 ml/min, about 400 ml/min, about 500 ml/min, about 600 ml/min, about 700 ml/min, or about 800 ml/min).
  • In some embodiments, TFF can be performed until a particular endpoint is reached, forming a TFF-treated composition. An endpoint can be any appropriate endpoint. In some embodiments, an endpoint can be a percentage of residual plasma (e.g., less than or equal to about 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1% of residual plasma). In some embodiments, an endpoint can be a relative absorbance at 280 nm (A280). For example, an endpoint can be an A280 (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm) that is less than or equal to about 50% (e.g., less than or equal to about 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, or 0.1%) of the A280 (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm) prior to TFF (e.g., of a starting material or of a diluted starting material). In some embodiments, an A280 can be relative to a system that measures 7.5% plasma=1.66 AU. In some embodiments, an instrument to measure A280 can be configured as follows: a 0.5 cm gap flow cell can be attached to the filtrate line of the TFF system. The flow cell can be connected to a photometer with fiber optics cables attached to each side of the flow cell (light source cable and light detector cable). The flow cell can be made with a silica glass lens on each side of the fiber optic cables. In some embodiments, an endpoint can be an absolute A280 (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm). For example, an endpoint can be an A280 that is less than or equal to 1.70 AU (e.g., less than or equal to 1.66, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, 1.3, 1.2, 1.1, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 AU) (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm). In some embodiments, a percentage of residual plasma, a relative A280, or an A280 can be determined based on the aqueous medium of a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium. In some embodiments, a percentage of residual plasma can be determined based on a known correlation to an A280. In some embodiments, an endpoint can be a platelet concentration, as TFF can include concentration or dilution of a sample (e.g., using a preparation agent). For example, an endpoint can be a platelet concentration of at least about 2000×103 platelets/μL (e.g., at least about 2050×103, 2100×103, 2150×103, 2200×103, 2250×103, 2300×103, 2350×103, 2400×103, 2450×103, or 2500×103 platelets/μL). As another example, an endpoint can be a platelet concentration of about 1000×103 to about 2500 platelets/μL (e.g., about 1000×103 to about 2000×103, about 1500×103 to about 2300×103, or about 1700×103 to about 2300×103 platelets/μL) In some embodiments, an endpoint can include more than one criterion (e.g., a percentage of residual plasma and a platelet concentration, a relative A280 and a platelet concentration, or an absolute A280 and a platelet concentration).
  • Typically, a TFF-treated composition is subsequently lyophilized, optionally with a thermal treatment step, to form a final blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)). However, in some cases, a TFF-treated composition can be considered to be a final blood product.
  • In some embodiments, a blood product can be prepared using centrifugation of a blood product (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone TFF)). In some embodiments, a blood product can be prepared without centrifugation of a blood product (e.g., an unprocessed blood product (e.g., donor apheresis material), or a partially processed blood product (e.g., a blood product that has undergone TFF)). Centrifugation can include any appropriate steps. In some embodiments, centrifugation can include a slow acceleration, a slow deceleration, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, centrifugation can include centrifugation at about 1400×g to about 1550×g (e.g., about 1400 to about 1450×g, about 1450 to about 1500×g, or 1500 to about 1550×g, about 1400×g, about 1410×g, about 1430×g, about 1450×g, about 1470×g, about 1490×g, about 1500×g, about 1510×g, about 1530×g, or about 1550×g). In some embodiments, the duration of centrifugation can be about 10 min to about 30 min (e.g., about 10 to about 20 min, about 20 to about 30 min, about 10 min, about 20 min, or about 30 min).
  • In some embodiments, a final blood product can be prepared using both TFF and centrifugation (e.g., TFF followed by centrifugation or centrifugation followed by TFF).
  • Also provided herein are compositions prepared by any of the methods described herein.
  • In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can be analyzed at multiple points during processing. In some embodiments, a starting material (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)) can be analyzed for antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content). In some embodiments, a starting material (e.g., donor apheresis material (e.g., pooled donor apheresis material)) can be analyzed for protein concentration (e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm (e.g., using a path length of 0.5 cm)). In some embodiments, a composition in an intermediate step of processing (e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of an unprocessed blood product) can be analyzed for antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content). In some embodiments, the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of the starting material. In some embodiments, a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be analyzed for antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content). In some embodiments described herein, a final blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium. In some embodiments, the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of the starting material. In some embodiments, a final blood product can have no detectable level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies. In some embodiments, the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can be analyzed at multiple points during processing. In some embodiments, donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed for antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content). In some embodiments, donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed for protein concentration (e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm). In some embodiments, a composition in an intermediate step of processing (e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of an unprocessed blood product) can be analyzed for antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content). In some embodiments, the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of donor apheresis plasma. In some embodiments, a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be analyzed for antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content). In some embodiments described herein, a final blood product can be a composition that includes platelets and an aqueous medium. In some embodiments, the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the antibody content of donor apheresis plasma. In some embodiments, a final blood product can have no detectable level of an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies. In some embodiments, the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • The protein concentration of a blood product can be measured by any appropriate method. In some embodiments, the protein concentration of a blood product can be measured using absorbance at 280 nm.
  • The antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of a blood product can be measured by any appropriate method.
  • In some embodiments, a FLOWPRA™ Screening or a LAB Screen Multi test kits from One Lambda, Thermo Fisher Scientific can be used as a method of HLA detection. Raw materials can be tested prior to the TFF or centrifugation processes to determine a baseline level of class I and II antibodies for Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA) and Human Neutrophil Antigens (HNA). Testing can be repeated after processing by centrifugation or TFF to measure the removal of HLA and HNA. Additional testing points can be performed throughout the TFF procedure to maintain in-process control. Post-lyophilization and annealing, random samples can be selected from a batch and qualitative HLA/HNA antibody testing can be performed to ensure reduction and compliance with current FDA testing and acceptance requirements.
  • In some embodiments, the antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content) of two blood products can be compared by determining the percentage of beads positive for a marker (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads bound to HLA or HNA antibodies, respectively). Any appropriate comparative method can be used. In some embodiments, the antibody content of two blood products can be compared using a method as described herein. In some embodiments, such a method can be carried out as follows. An aliquot of plasma (e.g., about 1 mL) platelet-poor plasma can be obtained. In some embodiments, an aliquot of filtered (e.g., using a 0.2 μm filter) platelet-poor plasma (PPP) (e.g., about 1 mL) can be obtained. Beads coated with Class I HLA and/or beads coated with Class II HLA can be added to the plasma (e.g., about 5 μL of each type of bead to about 20 μL of PPP) to form a mixture of PPP and beads. The mixture of PPP and beads can be vortexed. The mixture of PPP and beads can be incubated to form an incubated mixture. Any appropriate incubation conditions can be used. For example, in some embodiments, incubation can occur for a time (e.g., for about 30 minutes) at a temperature (e.g., at room temperature) with other conditions (e.g., in the dark) to form an incubated mixture. In some embodiments, incubation can include agitation (e.g., gentle rocking). The beads in the incubated mixture can be washed using any appropriate conditions. In some embodiments, the beads in the incubated mixture can be washed with a wash buffer. Washed beads can be separated from the incubated mixture by any appropriate method. In some embodiments, the washed beads can be separated by centrifugation (e.g., at 9,000×g for 2 minutes) to obtain pelleted beads. In some embodiments, the washing step can be repeated. The beads can be resuspended to form a bead solution. An antibody (e.g., an antibody that will bind to the assayed antibody content (e.g., HLA or HNA antibody content)) conjugated to a detectable moiety can be added to the bead solution (e.g., an αIgG conjugated to a fluorescent reporter, such as FITC). The antibody can be incubated with the bead solution under any appropriate conditions. In some embodiments, the antibody can be incubated for a time (e.g., for about 30 minutes) at a temperature (e.g., at room temperature) with other conditions (e.g., in the dark) to form labeled beads. Labeled beads can be washed to remove unbound antibody conjugated to a detectable moiety. The labeled beads can be washed using any appropriate conditions. In some embodiments, the labeled beads can be washed with a wash buffer. Washed labeled beads can be separated by any appropriate method. In some embodiments, the washed labeled beads can be separated by centrifugation (e.g., at 9,000 g for 2 minutes) to obtain pelleted labeled beads. In some embodiments, the washing step can be repeated. Labeled beads can be detected by any appropriate method. In some embodiments, labeled beads can be detected by flow cytometry. In some embodiments, detection can include measurement of the percentage of beads that are positive for the detectable moiety as compared to a negative control. In some embodiments, a negative control can be prepared as above, using a PPP sample that is known to be negative for antibodies (e.g. HLA Class I, HLA Class II, or HNA antibodies).
  • In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be analyzed at multiple points during processing. In some embodiments, a starting material (e.g., donor apheresis material) can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, a starting material (e.g., donor apheresis material) can be analyzed for protein concentration (e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm). In some embodiments, a blood product in an intermediate step of processing (e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material) can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, a blood product in an intermediate step of processing (e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material) can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from a starting material. In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads. In some embodiments, a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from a starting material. In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads. In some embodiments, the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • In some embodiments, a blood product (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be analyzed at multiple points during processing. In some embodiments, donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, donor apheresis plasma can be analyzed for protein concentration (e.g., by absorbance at 280 nm). In some embodiments, a blood product in an intermediate step of processing (e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material) can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, a blood product in an intermediate step of processing (e.g., when protein concentration reduced to less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the protein concentration of a starting material) can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from donor apheresis plasma. In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a blood product in an intermediate step of processing can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads. In some embodiments, a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be analyzed to determine the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads). In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product (e.g., (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) can be at least 5% reduced (e.g., 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, reduced) compared to the percent of positive beads from donor apheresis material. In some embodiments, the percent of positive beads (e.g., HLA or HNA coated beads) from a final blood product can be less than or equal to 75% (e.g., less than or equal to 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, or less) of the total amount of beads. In some embodiments, the aqueous medium of a composition as described herein can be analyzed as described herein.
  • A percentage of positive beads can be determined using any appropriate method. In some embodiments, positive beads can be determined compared to a negative control sample. A negative control sample can be any appropriate negative control sample. In some embodiments, a negative control sample can be used to determine positivity gating such that less than a certain percentage (e.g., between about 0.01% and about 1% (e.g., about 0.01% to about 0.05%, about 0.05% to about 0.1%, about 0.1% to about 0.5%, about 0.5% to about 1%, about 0.01%, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, about 0.5%, or about 1%)) of the negative control sample is present within the positivity gate. In some embodiments, a negative control sample can be a buffer (e.g., PBS). In some embodiments, a negative control sample can be a synthetic plasma composition. In some embodiments, a negative control sample can be a blood product known to be negative for the assayed antibodies (e.g., HLA or HNA antibodies).
  • Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by tangential flow filtration. Also provided herein is a method of reducing the amount of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by tangential flow filtration. Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of beads positive for an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by tangential flow filtration.
  • Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by centrifugation. Also provided herein is a method of reducing the amount of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by centrifugation. Also provided herein is a method of reducing the percentage of beads positive for an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) comprising platelets, the method comprising filtering the composition by centrifugation.
  • In some embodiments of any of the methods described herein, the amount of an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) can be reduced to below a reference level. A reference level can be any appropriate reference level. In some embodiments of any of the methods described herein, the percentage of beads positive an antibody (e.g., a HLA antibody (e.g., a HLA Class I antibody or a HLA Class II antibody) or a HNA antibody) in a composition (e.g., a blood product) can be reduced as compared to the blood product before undergoing the methods described herein. A percentage of beads positive for an antibody can be reduced by any appropriate amount. In some embodiments, a percentage of beads positive for an antibody can be reduced by at least 5% (e.g., reduced by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more) compared to the blood product before undergoing any of the methods described herein.
  • In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can undergo any appropriate additional processing steps. In some embodiments, a composition as described herein can be freeze-dried. In some embodiments, freeze-dried platelets can be thermally treated (e.g., at about 80° C. for about 24 hours).
  • For example, in some embodiments, a composition can be cryopreserved or freeze-dried. In some embodiments, a first composition (e.g., a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium as described herein) can be treated with a mixture. In some embodiments, a mixture can include a lyophilizing agent, including a base, a loading agent, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof, to form a second composition comprising platelets. In some embodiments, a loading agent can be a saccharide. In some embodiments, a saccharide can be a monosaccharide. In some embodiments, a saccharide can be sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose (e.g., dextrose), mannose, or xylose. In some embodiments, the loading agent can be polysucrose.
  • In some embodiments, a first composition or a second composition can be dried. In some embodiments, a first composition or a second composition can be dried with a cryoprotectant. In some embodiments, a cryoprotectant can include a saccharide, optionally a base, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof to form a third composition. In some embodiments, a cryoprotectant can be polysucrose.
  • In some embodiments, a first composition or a second composition can be freeze-dried. In some embodiments, a first composition or a second composition can be freeze-dried with a cryoprotectant. In some embodiments, a cryoprotectant can include a saccharide, optionally a base, and optionally at least one organic solvent such as an organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), or combinations thereof to form a fourth composition. In some embodiments freeze-drying can occur at a temperature of about −40° C. to about 5° C. In some embodiments, freeze-drying can occur over a gradient (e.g., about −40° C. to about 5° C.). In some embodiments, a secondary drying step can be carried out (e.g., at about 20° C. to about 40° C.).
  • Also provided herein are blood products (e.g., platelets, cryopreserved platelets, freeze-dried platelets (e.g., thrombosomes)) produced by any of the methods described herein.
  • In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for a composition as described herein by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is reduced by at least 10% (e.g., at least 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99%) as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a composition comprising platelets, centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • Within the process provided herein for making the compositions provided herein, optional addition of a lyophilizing agent can be the last step prior to drying. However, in some embodiments, the lyophilizing agent can be added at the same time or before other components of the composition, such as a salt, a buffer, optionally a cryoprotectant, or other components. In some embodiments, the lyophilizing agent is added to a preparation agent, thoroughly mixed to form a drying solution, dispensed into a drying vessel (e.g., a glass or plastic serum vial, a lyophilization bag), and subjected to conditions that allow for drying of a TFF-treated composition to form a dried composition.
  • In various embodiments, the lyophilization bag is a gas-permeable bag configured to allow gases to pass through at least a portion or all portions of the bag during the processing. The gas-permeable bag can allow for the exchange of gas within the interior of the bag with atmospheric gas present in the surrounding environment. The gas-permeable bag can be permeable to gases, such as oxygen, nitrogen, water, air, hydrogen, and carbon dioxide, allowing gas exchange to occur in the compositions provided herein. In some embodiments, the gas-permeable bag allows for the removal of some of the carbon dioxide present within an interior of the bag by allowing the carbon dioxide to permeate through its wall. In some embodiments, the release of carbon dioxide from the bag can be advantageous to maintaining a desired pH level of the composition contained within the bag.
  • In some embodiments, the container of the process herein is a gas-permeable container that is closed or sealed. In some embodiments, the container is a container that is closed or sealed and a portion of which is gas-permeable. In some embodiments, the surface area of a gas-permeable portion of a closed or sealed container (e.g., bag) relative to the volume of the product being contained in the container (hereinafter referred to as the “SA/V ratio”) can be adjusted to improve pH maintenance of the compositions provided herein. For example, in some embodiments, the SA/V ratio of the container can be at least about 2.0 cm2/mL (e.g., at least about 2.1 cm2/mL, at least about 2.2 cm2/mL, at least about 2.3 cm2/mL, at least about 2.4 cm2/mL, at least about 2.5 cm2/mL, at least about 2.6 cm2/mL, at least about 2.7 cm2/mL, at least about 2.8 cm2/mL, at least about 2.9 cm2/mL, at least about 3.0 cm2/mL, at least about 3.1 cm2/mL, at least about 3.2 cm2/mL, at least about 3.3 cm2/mL, at least about 3.4 cm2/mL, at least about 3.5 cm2/mL, at least about 3.6 cm2/mL, at least about 3.7 cm2/mL, at least about 3.8 cm2/mL, at least about 3.9 cm2/mL, at least about 4.0 cm2/mL, at least about 4.1 cm2/mL, at least about 4.2 cm2/mL, at least about 4.3 cm2/mL, at least about 4.4 cm2/mL, at least about 4.5 cm2/mL, at least about 4.6 cm2/mL, at least about 4.7 cm2/mL, at least about 4.8 cm2/mL, at least about 4.9 cm2/mL, or at least about 5.0 cm2/mL. In some embodiments, the SA/V ratio of the container can be at most about 10.0 cm2/mL (e.g., at most about 9.9 cm2/mL, at most about 9.8 cm2/mL, at most about 9.7 cm2/mL, at most about 9.6 cm2/mL, at most about 9.5 cm2/mL, at most about 9.4 cm2/mL, at most about 9.3 cm2/mL, at most about 9.2 cm2/mL, at most about 9.1 cm2/mL, at most about 9.0 cm2/mL, at most about 8.9 cm2/mL, at most about 8.8 cm2/mL, at most about 8.7 cm2/mL, at most about 8.6, cm2/mL at most about 8.5 cm2/mL, at most about 8.4 cm2/mL, at most about 8.3 cm2/mL, at most about 8.2 cm2/mL, at most about 8.1 cm2/mL, at most about 8.0 cm2/mL, at most about 7.9 cm2/mL, at most about 7.8 cm2/mL, at most about 7.7 cm2/mL, at most about 7.6 cm2/mL, at most about 7.5 cm2/mL, at most about 7.4 cm2/mL, at most about 7.3 cm2/mL, at most about 7.2 cm2/mL, at most about 7.1 cm2/mL, at most about 6.9 cm2/mL, at most about 6.8 cm2/mL, at most about 6.7 cm2/mL, at most about 6.6 cm2/mL, at most about 6.5 cm2/mL, at most about 6.4 cm2/mL, at most about 6.3 cm2/mL, at most about 6.2 cm2/mL, at most about 6.1 cm2/mL, at most about 6.0 cm2/mL, at most about 5.9 cm2/mL, at most about 5.8 cm2/mL, at most about 5.7 cm2/mL, at most about 5.6 cm2/mL, at most about 5.5 cm2/mL, at most about 5.4 cm2/mL, at most about 5.3 cm2/mL, at most about 5.2 cm2/mL, at most about 5.1 cm2/mL, at most about 5.0 cm2/mL, at most about 4.9 cm2/mL, at most about 4.8 cm2/mL, at most about 4.7 cm2/mL, at most about 4.6 cm2/mL, at most about 4.5 cm2/mL, at most about 4.4 cm2/mL, at most about 4.3 cm2/mL, at most about 4.2 cm2/mL, at most about 4.1 cm2/mL, or at most about 4.0 cm2/mL. In some embodiments, the SA/V ratio of the container can range from about 2.0 to about 10.0 cm2/mL (e.g., from about 2.1 cm2/mL to about 9.9 cm2/mL, from about 2.2 cm2/mL to about 9.8 cm2/mL, from about 2.3 cm2/mL to about 9.7 cm2/mL, from about 2.4 cm2/mL to about 9.6 cm2/mL, from about 2.5 cm2/mL to about 9.5 cm2/mL, from about 2.6 cm2/mL to about 9.4 cm2/mL, from about 2.7 cm2/mL to about 9.3 cm2/mL, from about 2.8 cm2/mL to about 9.2 cm2/mL, from about 2.9 cm2/mL to about 9.1 cm2/mL, from about 3.0 cm2/mL to about 9.0 cm2/mL, from about 3.1 cm2/mL to about 8.9 cm2/mL, from about 3.2 cm2/mL to about 8.8 cm2/mL, from about 3.3 cm2/mL to about 8.7 cm2/mL, from about 3.4 cm2/mL to about 8.6 cm2/mL, from about 3.5 cm2/mL to about 8.5 cm2/mL, from about 3.6 cm2/mL to about 8.4 cm2/mL, from about 3.7 cm2/mL to about 8.3 cm2/mL, from about 3.8 cm2/mL to about 8.2 cm2/mL, from about 3.9 cm2/mL to about 8.1 cm2/mL, from about 4.0 cm2/mL to about 8.0 cm2/mL, from about 4.1 cm2/mL to about 7.9 cm2/mL, from about 4.2 cm2/mL to about 7.8 cm2/mL, from about 4.3 cm2/mL to about 7.7 cm2/mL, from about 4.4 cm2/mL to about 7.6 cm2/mL, from about 4.5 cm2/mL to about 7.5 cm2/mL, from about 4.6 cm2/mL to about 7.4 cm2/mL, from about 4.7 cm2/mL to about 7.3 cm2/mL, from about 4.8 cm2/mL to about 7.2 cm2/mL, from about 4.9 cm2/mL to about 7.1 cm2/mL, from about 5.0 cm2/mL to about 6.9 cm2/mL, from about 5.1 cm2/mL to about 6.8 cm2/mL, from about 5.2 cm2/mL to about 6.7 cm2/mL, from about 5.3 cm2/mL to about 6.6 cm2/mL, from about 5.4 cm2/mL to about 6.5 cm2/mL, from about 5.5 cm2/mL to about 6.4 cm2/mL, from about 5.6 cm2/mL to about 6.3 cm2/mL, from about 5.7 cm2/mL to about 6.2 cm2/mL, or from about 5.8 cm2/mL to about 6.1 cm2/mL.
  • Gas-permeable closed containers (e.g., bags) or portions thereof can be made of one or more various gas-permeable materials. In some embodiments, the gas-permeable bag can be made of one or more polymers including fluoropolymers (such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) polymers), polyolefins (such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), high-density polyethylene (HDPE)), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), polystyrene, polyvinylchloride (PVC), silicone, and any combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) can undergo heat treatment. Heating can be performed at a temperature above about 25° C. (e.g., greater than about 40° C., 50° C., 60° C., 70° C., 80° C. or higher). In some embodiments, heating is conducted between about 70° C. and about 85° C. (e.g., between about 75° C. and about 85° C., or at about 75° C. or 80° C.). The temperature for heating can be selected in conjunction with the length of time that heating is to be performed. Although any suitable time can be used, typically, the lyophilized platelets are heated for at least 1 hour, but not more than 36 hours. Thus, in embodiments, heating is performed for at least 2 hours, at least 6 hours, at least 12 hours, at least 18 hours, at least 20 hours, at least 24 hours, or at least 30 hours. For example, the lyophilized platelets can be heated for 18 hours, 19 hours, 20 hours, 21 hours, 22 hours, 23 hours, 24 hours, 25 hours, 26 hours, 27 hours, 28 hours, 29 hours, or 30 hours. Non-limiting exemplary combinations include: heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for at least 30 minutes at a temperature higher than 30° C.; heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for at least 10 hours at a temperature higher than 50° C.; heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for at least 18 hours at a temperature higher than 75° C.; and heating the dried platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) for 24 hours at 80° C. In some embodiments, heating can be performed in sealed container, such as a capped vial. In some embodiments, a sealed container be subjected to a vacuum prior to heating. The heat treatment step, particularly in the presence of a cryoprotectant such as albumin or polysucrose, has been found to improve the stability and shelf-life of the freeze-dried platelets. Indeed, advantageous results have been obtained with the particular combination of serum albumin or polysucrose and a post-lyophilization heat treatment step, as compared to those cryoprotectants without a heat treatment step. A cryoprotectant (e.g., sucrose) can be present in any appropriate amount (e.g. about 3% to about 10% by mass or by volume of the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes).
  • In some cases, compositions comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) can be rehydrated with water (e.g., sterile water for injection) over about 10 minutes at about room temperature. In general, the rehydration volume is about equal to the volume used to fill each vial of thrombosomes prior to drying.
  • In some embodiments, the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) prepared as disclosed herein have a storage stability that is at least about equal to that of the platelets prior to the preparation.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises cryopreserving the platelets or platelet derivatives prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., with a preparation agent, e.g., a preparation agent described herein).
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises drying a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives, (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). In some embodiments, the method may further comprise heating the composition following the drying step. In some embodiments, the method may further comprise rehydrating the composition following the freeze-drying step or the heating step.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises freeze-drying a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) In some embodiments, the method may further comprise heating the composition following the freeze-drying step. In some embodiments, the method may further comprise rehydrating the composition following the freeze-drying step or the heating step.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises cold storing the platelets, platelet derivatives, or the thrombosomes prior to administering the platelets, platelet derivatives, or thrombosomes (e.g., with a preparation agent, e.g., a preparation agent described herein).
  • Storing conditions include, for example, standard room temperature storing (e.g., storing at a temperature ranging from about 20 to about 30° C.) or cold storing (e.g., storing at a temperature ranging from about 1 to about 10° C.). In some embodiments, the method further comprises cryopreserving, freeze-drying, thawing, rehydrating, and combinations thereof, a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). For example, in some embodiments, the method further comprises drying (e.g., freeze-drying) a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., with a preparation agent e.g., a preparation agent described herein) (e.g., to form thrombosomes) prior to administering the platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). In some embodiments, the method may further comprise rehydrating the composition obtained from the drying step.
  • In some embodiments, provided herein is a method for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes). The method can include diluting a starting material comprising platelets with an approximately equal weight (±10%) of a preparation agent (e.g., Buffer A, as provided in Example 1), concentrating the platelets to about 2250×103 cells/μL (±250×103) and then washed with 2-4 diavolumes (DV) (e.g., about 2 diavolumes) of the preparation agent to form a TFF-treated composition. The residual plasma percentage can be less than about 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content). Following washing, if the concentration of the cells in the TFF-treated composition is not about 2000×103 cells/μL (±300×103), the cells can be diluted with the preparation agent or can be concentrated to fall within this range. The method can further include lyophilizing the TFF-treated composition and subsequently treating the lyophilized composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives (e.g., thrombosomes) at about 80° C. for about 24 hours. In some embodiments, the method can further include a pathogen reduction step, for example, before diluting the starting material.
  • Also provided herein are compositions produced by any of the methods described herein.
  • In some embodiments, any of the compositions provided herein can be made by the methods described herein.
  • Specific embodiments disclosed herein may be further limited in the claims using “consisting of” or “consisting essentially of” language.
  • Exemplary Embodiments
  • Embodiment 1 is a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than or equal to 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 2 is the composition of embodiment 1, wherein the protein concentration of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 3 is the composition of embodiment 1 or 2, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 4 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-3, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 5 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-4, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 6 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-5, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 7 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-6, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 8 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-7, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 9 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-8, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 10 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-9, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 11 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-10, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 12 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-11, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 13 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-12, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 14 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-13, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 15 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-14, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 16 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-15, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 17 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-16, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 18 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-17, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 19 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-18, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 20 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-19, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 21 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-20, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 22 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-21, wherein protein concentration is determined by absorbance at 280 nanometers (nm) with a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 23 is the composition of embodiment 22, wherein the absorbance at 280 nm is less than or equal to 1.7 AU.
  • Embodiment 24 is the composition of embodiment 22, wherein the absorbance at 280 nm is less than or equal to 1.66 AU.
  • Embodiment 25 is the composition of embodiment 22, wherein the absorbance at 280 nm is less than or equal to 1.6 AU.
  • Embodiment 26 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-25, wherein the platelet count is at least 200×103 platelets/μL.
  • Embodiment 27 is the composition of embodiment 26, wherein the platelet count is at least 2250×103 platelets/μL.
  • Embodiment 28 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-27, wherein the composition has an erythrocyte count less than 0.2×106 erythrocytes/μL.
  • Embodiment 29 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-27, wherein the composition further comprises erythrocytes.
  • Embodiment 30 is the composition embodiment 29, wherein the erythrocyte count is less than 0.2×106 erythrocytes/μL.
  • Embodiment 31 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-30, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 32 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-31, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 33 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-32, wherein the composition is negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 34 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 35 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-34, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 36 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-35, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 37 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 38 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 39 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 40 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 41 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 42 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 43 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 44 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 45 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-33, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 46 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-45, wherein the aqueous medium further comprises a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 47 is the composition of embodiment 46, wherein the buffering agent is HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • Embodiment 48 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-47, wherein the base is sodium bicarbonate.
  • Embodiment 49 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-48, wherein the loading agent is a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 50 is the composition of embodiment 49, wherein the monosaccharide is selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • Embodiment 51 is the composition of embodiment 49, wherein the monosaccharide is trehalose.
  • Embodiment 52 is the composition of any one of embodiments 49-51, wherein the polysaccharide is polysucrose.
  • Embodiment 53 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-52, wherein the salt is sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 54 is the composition of any one of embodiments 46-53, wherein the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 55 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-54, wherein the composition is prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, centrifugation of a starting material comprising platelets, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 56 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 57 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 58 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 59 is the composition of embodiment 55, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 60 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-59, wherein the starting material is:
      • a) positive for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test;
      • b) positive for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test;
      • c) positive for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test; or
      • d) one or more of a), b), or c).
  • Embodiment 61 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-60, wherein the starting material has a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/ml.
  • Embodiment 62 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-61, wherein the starting material comprises donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 63 is the composition of embodiment 62, wherein the donor blood product is pooled donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 64 is the composition of any one of embodiments 62-63, wherein the starting material comprises donor apheresis material.
  • Embodiment 65 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-64, wherein TFF comprises concentrating.
  • Embodiment 66 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-65, wherein TFF comprises diafiltering.
  • Embodiment 67 is the composition of embodiment 66, wherein diafiltering comprises diafiltering with at least two diavolumes.
  • Embodiment 68 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-67, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange.
  • Embodiment 69 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-68, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 1 μm.
  • Embodiment 70 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-68, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 0.45 μm.
  • Embodiment 71 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-70, wherein TFF is performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C.
  • Embodiment 72 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 73 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 74 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 75 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 76 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 77 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-71, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 78 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-77, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 79 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-77, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 80 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-77, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 81 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-80, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000×103 platelets/μL.
  • Embodiment 82 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-80, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250×103 platelets/μL.
  • Embodiment 83 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-82, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange into a preparation agent comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 84 is the composition of embodiment 83, wherein the buffering agent is HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • Embodiment 85 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-84, wherein the base is sodium bicarbonate.
  • Embodiment 86 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-85, wherein the loading agent is a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 87 is the composition of embodiment 86, wherein the monosaccharide is selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, and xylose.
  • Embodiment 88 is the composition of embodiment 86, wherein the monosaccharide is trehalose.
  • Embodiment 89 is the composition of any one of embodiments 86-88, wherein the polysaccharide is polysucrose.
  • Embodiment 90 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-89, wherein the salt is sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 91 is the composition of any one of embodiments 83-90, wherein the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 92 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-91, wherein centrifugation comprises centrifugation at 1400×g to about 1550×g.
  • Embodiment 93 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-91, wherein centrifugation comprises centrifugation at 1450×g to about 1500×g.
  • Embodiment 94 is the composition of any one of embodiments 55-91, wherein the process does not comprise centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets.
  • Embodiment 95 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 96 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 97 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 98 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-94, wherein the composition comprises less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 99 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-98, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%.
  • Embodiment 100 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-98, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%.
  • Embodiment 101 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-98, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 102 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-101, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 103 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-101, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 104 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-101, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 105 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-104, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 106 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-104, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 107 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-104, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 108 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-107, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 25%.
  • Embodiment 109 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-107, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 110 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-107, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 70%.
  • Embodiment 111 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-110, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%.
  • Embodiment 112 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-110, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 113 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-110, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 15%.
  • Embodiment 114 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-110, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%.
  • Embodiment 115 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 116 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 117 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 118 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-114, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 119 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-118, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane.
  • Embodiment 120 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-119, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 121 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-119, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 122 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-121, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 123 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-121, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 124 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-123, wherein the platelet derivatives comprise thrombosomes.
  • Embodiment 125 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1 or 22-124, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 126 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-5 or 22-125, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 127 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-5 or 22-126, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 15% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 128 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-9 or 22-127, wherein the protein concentration is about 8% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 129 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-9 or 22-128, wherein the protein concentration is about 7% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 130 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 25 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • Embodiment 131 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 50 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • Embodiment 132 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a potency of at least 1.5 thrombin generation potency units (TGPU) per 106 particles.
  • Embodiment 133 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of at least about 70×103 particles/μL, produce an occlusion time of less than 14 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • Embodiment 134 is the composition of any one of embodiments 1-129, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 70×103 particles/μL produce an occlusion time of less than 12 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • Embodiment 135 is a process for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the process comprising:
      • tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, a diluted starting material comprising platelets, a concentrated platelet composition, or a combination thereof, thereby preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and aqueous medium,
      • wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than or equal to 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 136 is the process of embodiment 125, wherein the starting material is:
      • a) positive for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test;
      • b) positive for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test;
      • c) positive for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test; or
      • d) one or more of a), b), and c).
  • Embodiment 137 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-136, wherein the starting material has a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/mL.
  • Embodiment 138 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-137, wherein the starting material comprises donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 139 is the process of embodiment 138, wherein the donor blood product is pooled donor blood product.
  • Embodiment 140 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-139, wherein the starting material comprises donor apheresis material.
  • Embodiment 141 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-140, wherein TFF comprises concentrating.
  • Embodiment 142 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-141, wherein TFF comprises diafiltering.
  • Embodiment 143 is the process of embodiment 142, wherein diafiltering comprises diafiltering with at least two diavolumes.
  • Embodiment 144 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-143, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange.
  • Embodiment 145 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-144, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 1 μm.
  • Embodiment 146 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-145, wherein TFF is carried out using a membrane with pore size of about 0.2 μm to about 0.45 μm.
  • Embodiment 147 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-146, wherein TFF is performed at a temperature of about 20° C. to about 37° C.
  • Embodiment 148 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-147, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 50% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 149 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 30% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 150 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-149, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 10% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 151 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-150, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 5% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 152 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-151, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 3% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 153 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-152, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1% of the absorbance at 280 nm of the starting material, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 154 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-153, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.70 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 155 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-154, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.66 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 156 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-155, wherein TFF is carried out until the absorbance at 280 nm of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 1.60 AU, using a path length of 0.5 cm.
  • Embodiment 157 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-156, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2000×103 platelets/μL.
  • Embodiment 158 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-156, wherein TFF is carried out until the platelet concentration is at least about 2250×103 platelets/μL.
  • Embodiment 159 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-158, wherein TFF comprises diafiltering with a preparation agent comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 160 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-159, wherein TFF comprises buffer exchange into a preparation agent comprising a buffering agent, a base, a loading agent, optionally a salt, and optionally at least one organic solvent.
  • Embodiment 161 is the process of any one of embodiments 149-160, wherein the buffering agent is HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid).
  • Embodiment 162 is the process of any one of embodiments 149-161, wherein the base is sodium bicarbonate.
  • Embodiment 163 is the process of any one of embodiments 149-162, wherein the loading agent is a monosaccharide, a polysaccharide, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 164 is the process of embodiment 163, wherein the monosaccharide is selected from the group consisting of sucrose, maltose, trehalose, glucose, mannose, xylose, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 165 is the process of embodiment 163, wherein the monosaccharide is trehalose.
  • Embodiment 166 is the process of any one of embodiments 163-165, wherein the polysaccharide is polysucrose.
  • Embodiment 167 is the process of any one of embodiments 159-166, wherein the salt is sodium chloride, potassium chloride, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 168 is the process of any one of embodiments 159-167, wherein the organic solvent is selected from the group consisting of ethanol, acetic acid, acetone, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, methanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, tetrahydrofuran (THF), N-methyl pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide (DMAC), and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 169 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-168, wherein the process does not comprise centrifugation of the starting material comprising platelets, the diluted starting material comprising platelets, the concentrated platelet composition, or the combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 170 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-169, wherein the process does not comprise centrifugation of a composition comprising platelets.
  • Embodiment 171 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 50% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 172 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 75% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 173 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 90% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 174 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-170, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is reduced by at least 95% as compared to a similar composition not prepared by a process comprising tangential flow filtration of a blood product composition, centrifugation of a blood product composition, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 175 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-174, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 176 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-175, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 177 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-176, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibodies that is less than 30% of the human leukocyte antigen (HLA) Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 178 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-17, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human neutrophil antigen (HNA) antibodies that is less than 30% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 179 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-178, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 180 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-179, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 181 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-180, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 10% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 182 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-181, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 10% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 183 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-182, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 5% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 184 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-183, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 185 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-184, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 5% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 186 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-185, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 5% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 187 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-186, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 3% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 188 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-187, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 189 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-188, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 3% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 190 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-189, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 3% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 191 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-190, wherein the protein concentration is less than or equal to 1% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 192 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-191, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class I antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class I antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 193 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-192, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HLA Class II antibodies that is less than 1% of the HLA Class II antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 194 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-193, wherein the aqueous medium has a concentration of human HNA antibodies that is less than 1% of the HNA antibody concentration in donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 195 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-194, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 196 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-195, wherein the composition is negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 197 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-196, wherein the composition is negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test.
  • Embodiment 198 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-197, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 199 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-198, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 200 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-199, wherein a percentage of beads positive for an antibody selected from the group consisting of HLA Class I antibodies, HLA Class II antibodies, and HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, Class II HLAs, or HNAs, respectively, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 201 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-200, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 202 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-201, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 203 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-202, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class I antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class I HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 204 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-203, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 205 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-204, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 206 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-205, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HLA Class II antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with Class II HLAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 207 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-206, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs is less than 5%.
  • Embodiment 208 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-207, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNA antibodies, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 3%.
  • Embodiment 209 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-208, wherein a percentage of beads positive for HNAs, as determined for the composition by flow cytometry using beads coated with HNAs, is less than 1%.
  • Embodiment 210 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 211 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 212 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 4.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 213 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-209, wherein the composition comprises less than 3.5% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
  • Embodiment 214 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-213, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%.
  • Embodiment 215 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-213, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 60%.
  • Embodiment 216 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-213, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 217 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-216, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 65%.
  • Embodiment 218 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-216, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 219 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-216, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 220 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-219, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 10% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 221 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-219, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 15% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 222 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-219, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives retain at least about 20% of the lactate dehydrogenase activity of donor apheresis platelets.
  • Embodiment 223 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-222, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 25%.
  • Embodiment 224 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-222, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 225 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-222, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 75%.
  • Embodiment 226 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%.
  • Embodiment 227 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 228 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 15%.
  • Embodiment 229 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-225, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 20%.
  • Embodiment 230 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 10%.
  • Embodiment 231 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 50%.
  • Embodiment 232 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%.
  • Embodiment 233 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-229, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 90%.
  • Embodiment 234 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-233, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane.
  • Embodiment 235 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-234, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 2.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 236 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-234, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of less than 1.5 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 237 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-236, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.4 to about 1.3 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 238 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-236, wherein the aqueous medium has a lactate concentration of about 0.5 to about 1.0 mmol/L.
  • Embodiment 239 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-238, wherein the platelet derivatives comprise thrombosomes.
  • Embodiment 240 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-239, further comprising a pathogen reduction step.
  • Embodiment 241 is the process of embodiment 240, wherein the pathogen reduction step precedes TFF.
  • Embodiment 242 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-241, further comprising lyophilizing the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • Embodiment 243 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-241, further comprising cryopreserving the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • Embodiment 244 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-243, further comprising thermally treating the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
  • Embodiment 245 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-174, or 195-244, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 246 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-149, 154-178, or 195-245, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 30% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 247 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-178, or 195-246, wherein the protein concentration is about 5% to about 15% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 248 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-182, or 195-247, wherein the protein concentration is about 8% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 249 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-148, 154-182, or 195-248, wherein the protein concentration is about 7% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
  • Embodiment 250 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 25 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • Embodiment 251 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 50 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
  • Embodiment 252 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a potency of at least 1.5 thrombin generation potency units (TGPU) per 106 particles.
  • Embodiment 253 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of at least about 70×103 particles/μL, produce an occlusion time of less than 14 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • Embodiment 254 is the process of any one of embodiments 135-249, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of at least about 70×103 particles/μL, produce an occlusion time of less than 12 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
  • Embodiment 255 is a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium prepared by the process of any one of embodiments 135-254.
  • Embodiment 256 is a process for preparing freeze-dried platelets, comprising:
      • a) preparing a composition comprising platelets and an aqueous medium using the process of any one of embodiments 135-254; and
      • b) freeze-drying the composition comprising platelets and the aqueous medium.
  • Embodiment 257 is a composition comprising freeze-dried platelets, prepared by the process of embodiment 235.
  • Embodiment 258 is a method for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the method comprising:
      • diluting a starting material comprising platelets to form a diluted starting material;
      • concentrating the diluted starting material such that the platelets have a concentration of about 2250×103 cells/4, (±250×103) to form a concentrated platelet composition; and
      • washing the concentrated platelet composition with at least 2 diavolumes (DV) of a preparation agent to form a TFF-treated composition.
  • Embodiment 259 is the method of embodiment 258, wherein diluting comprises diluting with an approximately equal weight (±10%) of the preparation agent.
  • Embodiment 260 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-259, further comprising a pathogen reduction step.
  • Embodiment 261 is the method of embodiment 260, wherein the pathogen reduction step occurs before diluting the starting material.
  • Embodiment 262 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-261, wherein residual plasma percentage is less than or equal to about 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content).
  • Embodiment 263 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-262, wherein following washing, if the concentration of the cells in the TFF-treated composition is not about 2000×103 cells/μL (±300×103), diluting the preparation agent or can be concentrated to fall within this range.
  • Embodiment 264 is the method of any one of embodiments 258-263, further comprising lyophilizing the TFF-treated composition to form a lyophilized composition.
  • Embodiment 265 is the method of embodiment 264, further comprising treating the lyophilized composition at about 80° C. for about 24 hours.
  • Embodiment 266 is a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives prepared by the method of any one of embodiments 258-265.
  • Embodiment 267 is a method of treating a clotting-related disease or condition in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of the composition of any of embodiments 1 to 134, 255 or 266.
  • Embodiment 268 is the method of embodiment 267, wherein the clotting-related disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of Von Willebrand Disease, a hemophilia, thrombasthenia, thrombocytopenia, thrombocytopenic purpura, trauma, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 269 is a method of treating a clotting-related disease or condition in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a composition prepared by the process of any of embodiments 135 to 254.
  • Embodiment 270 is the method of embodiment 269, wherein the clotting-related disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of Von Willebrand Disease, a hemophilia, thrombasthenia, thrombocytopenia, thrombocytopenic purpura, trauma, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 271 is a method of treating a clotting-related treating a disease or condition subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a composition prepared by the process of any of embodiments 258 to 266.
  • Embodiment 272 is the method of embodiment 271, wherein the clotting-related disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of Von Willebrand Disease, a hemophilia, thrombasthenia, thrombocytopenia, thrombocytopenic purpura, trauma, or a combination thereof.
  • EXAMPLES Example 1. Tangential Flow Filtration (TFF) Method
  • Apheresis platelets underwent tangential flow filtration in accordance with a standard operating procedure, including the following process steps: platelet dilution, platelet concentration and platelet washing.
  • The platelet donor units are initially pooled into a common vessel. The platelets may or may not be initially diluted with an acidified washing buffer (e.g., a control buffer) to reduce platelet activation during processing. The platelets can undergo two processing pathways; either washed with control buffer until a desired residual component is reached (e.g., donor plasma) before being concentrated to a final product concentration or the platelets are concentrated to a final product concentration before being washed with control buffer until a desired residual component is reached (e.g., donor plasma). TFF processed platelets are then filled into vials, lyophilized and thermally treated.
  • One particular protocol follows.
  • For all steps of the TFF process in this Example, Buffer A was used. The process was carried out at a temperature of 18-24° C.
  • Buffer A
  • Buffer A
    Component Value (±1%)
    HEPES 7.6 mM
    NaCl
    60 mM
    KCl 3.84 mM
    Dextrose 2.4 mM
    NaHCO3 9.6 mM
    Trehalose 80 mM
    Ethanol 0.8%
    Polysucrose
    6% (w/v)
    pH 6.6-6.8
  • Platelets were loaded onto the TFF (PendoTECH controller system), which was prepared with a Repligen TFF Cassette (XPM45L01E). The platelets were diluted with an equal weight (±10%) of Buffer A. The platelets were concentrated to about 2250×103 cells/μL (±250×103) and then washed with approximately 2 diavolumes (DV) of Buffer A. The target plasma percentage was typically less than 15% relative plasma (as determined by plasma protein content). Removal of plasma proteins was monitored through 280 nm UV absorbance against known correlations. Following washing, if the concentration of the cells was not 2000×103 cells/μL (±300×103), the cells were either diluted with Buffer A or were concentrated to fall within this range. The cells were typically then lyophilized and subsequently thermally treated at 80° C. for 24 hours, thereby forming thrombosomes, but sometimes the cells were used before lyophilization (sometimes called thrombosomes ‘pre-lyo’). Thrombosomes were typically rehydrated with water over 10 minutes at room temperature. In general, the rehydration volume is equal to the volume used to fill each vial of thrombosomes prior to drying.
  • In some cases, samples were drawn at UV readings correlating to about 51% relative plasma volume, about 8.1% relative plasma volume, about 6.0% relative plasma volume, and about 1.3% relative plasma readings. Low volume aliquots were sampled throughout each processing step with about 6.0% and under samples.
  • Example 2. Testing Plan and Assay Protocol
  • Testing Plan:
  • Thrombosomes Batch A was produced by the TFF method described in Example 1 using apheresis platelets collected from high-αHLA titer donors as reported by a platelet supplier.
  • Individual donor units, the donor pool, and timepoints along the TFF process were collected for αHLA testing. Plasma was added to HLA beads (One Lambda FLOWPRA™ Screen Test), stained with an αIgG secondary antibody, and evaluated for αHLA-IgG binding by flow cytometry (Novocyte 3005 configuration)
  • Two bead types were evaluated: one coated with HLA Class I antigens and the other coated with HLA Class II antigens. Bead gating was performed as described in the FLOWPRA™ Screen Test instructions. “αHLA Positive” populations are gated on the basis of a George King (GK) PPP (platelet-poor plasma) negative control and a single-donor fresh-drawn negative control. Additional negative controls are collected following production to confirm ideal placement of these positivity gates.
  • Compensation settings were established using FITC- and PE-conjugated mouse IgG on Spherotech COMPtrol compensation beads. The HLA Class II beads fluoresce in PE and the secondary antibody used for IgG detection is FITC-conjugated.
  • Assay Protocol:
      • 1. Thaw the One Lambda FLOWPRA™ Screen Test kit components to 4° C.
      • 2. Obtain approximately 1 mL aliquots of 0.2 μm filtered PPP from each desired sample point.
      • 3. To a 1.7 mL microcentrifuge tube, pipet 5 μL Class I HLA beads and 5 μL Class II HLA beads. Add 20 μL filtered test plasma. Vortex to mix.
      • 4. Incubate plasma with HLA-coated beads for 30 minutes at room temperature in the dark with gentle rocking/agitation.
      • 5. Dilute 10× wash buffer to the appropriate volume of 1× working stock with deionized water.
      • 6. Wash the beads with 1 mL wash buffer. Vortex and centrifuge at 9,000 g×2 minutes to pellet the beads. Aspirate the supernatant.
      • 7. Repeat step 6.
      • 8. Dilute 100×αIgG-FITC to the appropriate volume of 1× working stock with wash buffer.
      • 9. Add 100 μL 1×αIgG-FITC to the tube containing washed HLA beads. Vortex to mix.
      • 10. Incubate HLA beads with αIgG-FITC for 30 minutes at room temperature in the dark with gentle rocking/agitation.
      • 11. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to wash away unbound αIgG-FITC.
      • 12. Resuspend the washed HLA beads in 200 μL PBS. Vortex to mix.
      • 13. Pipet approximately 100 μL of the HLA bead suspension to the appropriate well(s) of a 96-well U-bottom microplate and dock onto the NovoSampler.
      • 14. Use the NovoCyte to collect events by flow cytometry.
        • a. Slow collection of 10,000 events in the previously determined FLOWPRA™ Beads gate with FSC-H threshold 10,000.
        • b. Secondary stop conditions were 2 minutes run time and 40 μL total sample volume.
        • c. The SIP is washed between each sample to minimize carryover between wells. A well of PBS is run between each triplicate set to minimize carryover between testing points.
  • Results
  • Example 3. Gate Placement and Negative Controls
  • Initial gate placement for identification of Class I and Class II HLA beads is determined using FLOWPRA™ beads in PBS. (FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B)
  • Background/nonspecific binding is established using GK PPP and fresh donor PPP in triplicate. (Exemplary data is shown in FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3A, and FIG. 3B) Note that GK PPP is shifted higher on FITC-H than the fresh donor plasma. This may be due to donor variability or freeze/thaw effects on the GK plasma. Additional sampling is necessary. Positivity gates are placed such that <1% of GK PPP returns FITC-positive.
  • Example 4. Single Donor Results
  • Representative FITC-H histograms from each HLA class are given for each sample. Positivity >1% is positive. Fluorescence ratios are reported against the GK PPP negative control (Class I and Class II bead FITC-H intensity). Fluorescence ratios >1.0 are positive. As additional negative controls are collected these positivity gates and fluorescence ratios will be updated.
  • Populations are negative for HLA Class I or Class II antibodies if both percent positivity and fluorescence ratio are <1 for that bead type.
  • Donor #1: HLA Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 0.2% with fluorescence ratio 0.3; average positivity for Class II is 16.5% with fluorescence ratio 1.6. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B).
  • Donor #2: HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 1.3% with fluorescence ratio 1.4; average positivity for Class II is 20.3% with fluorescence ratio 1.9. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B).
  • Donor #3: HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 85.2% with fluorescence ratio 14.4. Average positivity for Class II is 12.0% with fluorescence ratio 0.8. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B).
  • Donor #4: HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 83.5% with fluorescence ratio 14.5. Average positivity for Class II is 12.6% with fluorescence ratio 0.8. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B).
  • Donor #5: HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 4.9% with fluorescence ratio 1.2. Average positivity for Class II is 1.3% with fluorescence ratio 0.8. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B).
  • Donor #6: HLA Class I Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 2.7% with fluorescence ratio 0.9. Average positivity for Class II is 0.3% with fluorescence ratio 0.7. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B).
  • Donor #7: HLA Class II Positive. Average positivity for from triplicate data Class I is 0.7% with fluorescence ratio 0.5. Average positivity for Class II is 9.0% with fluorescence ratio 1.3. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B).
  • The results for Donors 1-7 are also shown in Table 1.
  • TABLE 1
    Donor 1 Donor 2 Donor 3 Donor 4 Donor 5 Donor 6 Donor 7
    Average Percent 0.2 1.3 85.2 83.5 4.9 2.7 0.7
    Positivity Class I
    Average Percent 16.5 20.3 12.0 12.6 1.3 0.3 9.0
    Positivity Class II
    Average Fluorescence 0.3 1.4 14.4 14.5 1.2 0.9 0.5
    Ratio Class I
    Average Fluorescence 1.6 1.9 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.7 1.3
    Ratio Class II
  • Because there might be HLA-positive donors in the GK PNP pool, Table 2 displays results against an N=1 HLA-negative donor.
  • TABLE 2
    Donor 1 Donor 2 Donor 3 Donor 4 Donor 5 Donor 6 Donor 7
    AVERAGE PERCENT 0.3 12.3 86.1 84.8 12.4 7.6 1.1
    POSITIVITY CLASS I
    AVERAGE PERCENT 66.6 67.0 19.1 19.5 43.1 36.3 22.6
    POSITIVITY CLASS II
    AVERAGE FLUORESCENCE 0.9 4.2 44.4 44.6 3.8 2.9 1.6
    RATIO CLASS I
    AVERAGE FLUORESCENCE 4.4 5.4 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.0 3.5
    RATIO CLASS II
  • Example 5. Filtration Results
  • Pool: HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 61.1% with fluorescence ratio 4.6. Average positivity for Class II is 9.0% with fluorescence ratio 1.1. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B).
  • Initial Dilution (51%): HLA Class I and Class II Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 48.2% with fluorescence ratio 4.2. Average positivity for Class II is 5.9% with fluorescence ratio 0.9. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B).
  • “20%” Plasma (8.1%): HLA Class I Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 2.4% with fluorescence ratio 1.0. Average positivity for Class II is 0.2% with fluorescence ratio 0.5. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B).
  • “<10%” Plasma (6.0%): Borderline HLA Class I Positive. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 1.1% with fluorescence ratio 1.0. Average positivity for Class II is 0.2% with fluorescence ratio 0.5. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B).
  • “<3%” Plasma (1.3%): HLA Negative. Average positivity from triplicate data for Class I is 0.4% with fluorescence ratio 0.2. Average positivity for Class II is 0.1% with fluorescence ratio 0.4. (Exemplary data is shown FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B).
  • The filtration results are also shown in Tables 3A and 3B.
  • TABLE 3A
    51% 8.1% 6.0% 1.3%
    Pool Plasma Plasma Plasma Plasma
    Average Percent 61.1 48.2 2.4 1.1 0.4
    Positivity Class I
    Average Percent 9.0 5.9 0.2 0.2 0.1
    Positivity Class II
    Average Fluorescence 4.6 4.2 1.0 0.7 0.2
    Ratio Class I
    Average Fluorescence 1.1 0.9 0.5 0.5 0.4
    Ratio Class II
  • TABLE 3B
    Background fluorescence determined using HLA beads in PBS was
    subtracted from sample fluorescence prior to calculation of percent reduction
    in mean fluorescence intensity (a measure of reduction in antibody binding).
    Class I HLA Beads Class II HLA Beads
    Percent Reduction in With background sub- With background sub-
    Fluorescence Intensity traction from beads in PBS traction from beads in PBS
    Pool  0.0%  0.0%
    51% Residual Plasma  9.6%  18.7%
    8.1% Residual Plasma  80.8%  74.8%
    6.0% Residual Plasma  87.4%  72.0%
    1.3% Residual Plasma  97.3%  83.8%
    Thrombosomes 4.9%  95.8%  91.4%
    Residual Plasma Unbaked
    Thrombosomes 4.9% 100.0% 100.6%
    Residual Plasma Baked
    Thrombosomes 1.3% 100.0% 100.9%
    Residual Plasma Unbaked
    Thrombosomes 1.3%  99.6% 100.8%
    Residual Plasma Baked
    Values ≥100% indicate complete reduction in detectable HLA antibody binding to the indicated beads.
  • Because there might be HLA-positive donors in the GK PNP pool, Table 4 displays results against an N=1 HLA-negative donor.
  • TABLE 4
    51% 8% 6% <3%
    Pool Plasma Plasma Plasma Plasma
    AVERAGE PERCENT 77.9 64.7 7.6 2.2 0.4
    POSITIVITY CLASS I
    AVERAGE PERCENT 52.8 42.7 4.9 0.7 0.2
    POSITIVITY CLASS II
    AVERAGE FLUORESCENCE 14.3 12.9 3.0 2.1 0.7
    RATIO CLASS I
    AVERAGE FLUORESCENCE 2.9 2.6 1.4 1.4 1.2
    RATIO CLASS II
  • Example 6. Surface Markers and Thrombin Generation
  • Thrombosomes batch were produced by the TFF method described in Example 1 and assayed for cell surface marker expression using flow cytometry.
  • Flow cytometry was used to assess thrombosomes for expression of CD41, CD62, and phosphatidylserine (PS). Samples included approximately 270,000/μL thrombosomes during staining and were diluted approximately 1:34 before the sample was analyzed in the cytometer. Thrombosome samples were rehydrated and diluted 1:2 in deionized water. A stock of anti-CD41 was diluted by adding 47.6 μL of antibody to 52.4 μL of HMTA. Samples stained with anti-CD41 were made by adding 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes to 10 μL HMTA and 10 μL of diluted CD41 antibody. An anti-CD62 master mix was prepared by combining 12 μL anti-CD62 with 23.8 μL anti-CD41 and 64.2 μL of HMTA. An isotype control mix was made in the same manner. Samples stained with anti-CD62 were made by adding 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes to 20 μL of the anti-CD62 master. The isotype master mix was used to make isotype control samples in the same manner. An annexin V (AV) master mix was prepared by combining 11.7 of AV with 83.3 μL of anti-CD41 and 80 μL of HMTA. Sample stained with AV were made by adding 20 μL of diluted thrombosomes containing 50 mM GPRP to 20 μL of HMTA containing 15 mM CaCl2 and 20 μL of the AV master mix. Negative gating control samples were made in the same manner using HMTA without calcium to prevent AV binding to PS. All samples were incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes. After incubation 1 mL HBS was added to all samples. HBS used to dilute AV test samples contained 5 mM CaCl2. Anti-CD41 binding was used to identify the population of interest. CD62 expression and PS expression was assessed by anti-CD62 and AV binding within the CD41 positive population.
  • Glycoprotein IIb (GPIIb, also known as antigen CD41) expression was assayed using an anti-CD41 antibody (4.8 μL, Beckman Coulter part #IM1416U). The assayed thrombosomes demonstrated CD41 positivity (Table 5; FIG. 16 )
  • TABLE 5
    Batch CD41 Positivity (%)
    1 81.5
    2 79.4
    3 85.7
    4 78.2
    5 81.5
    6 84.0
    7 78.5
    Mean 81.3
  • Phosphatidylserine (PS) expression was assayed using annexin V (AV) (1.3 μL, BD Biosciences Cat. No. 550475). AV is a calcium-dependent phospholipid binding protein. The assayed thrombosomes demonstrated AV positivity (Table 6; FIG. 17 ).
  • TABLE 6
    Batch AV Positivity (%)
    1 96.7
    2 89.9
    3 95.3
    4 95.4
    5 95.9
    6 96.2
    7 93.5
    Mean 94.7
  • P-selectin (also called CD62P) expression was assayed using an anti-CD62P antibody (2.4 μL, BD Biosciences Cat. No. 550888). The assayed thrombosomes demonstrated CD62 positivity (Table 7, FIG. 18 )
  • TABLE 7
    Batch CD62 Positivity (%)
    1 94.2
    2 93.1
    3 89.8
    4 92.4
    5 92.5
    6 87.3
    7 90.7
    Mean 91.4
  • Thrombin Generation was measured at 4.8×103 thrombosomes/μl in the presence of PRP Reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids using the below protocol. On average, the Thrombin Peak Height (TPH) for a thrombosomes sample was 60.3 nM. Cephalin was used as a positive control. (Table 8; FIG. 19 )
  • For each vial tested, a rehydrated sample of thrombosomes was diluted to 7,200 particles per μL based on the flow cytometry particle count using 30% solution of Octaplas in control buffer. In a 96 well plate, sample wells were generated by adding 20 μL of PRP reagent (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86196) and 80 μL of diluted thrombosomes. Calibrator wells were generated by adding 20 μL of Thrombin Calibrator reagent (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86197) to 80 μL of diluted thrombosomes. The plate was loaded into the plate reader and incubated in the dark at 40° C. for 10 minutes. During sample incubation, FluCa solution was prepared by adding 40 μL of FluCa substrate (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86197) to 1.6 mL of Fluo-Buffer (Diagnostica Stago Catalog No. 86197) warmed to 37° C. and vortexed to mix. The FluCa solution was aspirated into the dispensing syringe and 20 μL was mechanically dispensed into each reaction well, bringing the final thrombosomes concentration in each well to 4,800 particles per μL and starting the thrombin generation reaction. Thrombin generation was measured via fluorescence in each well over the course of 75 minutes.
  • An exemplary step-by-step protocol follows:
      • 1. Open CAT software; set up instrument; and prepare PRP reagent (including Tissue Factor and some phospholipids), calibrator, and fluo-buffer and fluo-substrate according to manufacturer guidelines.
      • 2. Thaw Octaplas and TGA dilution buffer in 37° C. water bath for 10 minutes.
      • 3. Add thawed Octaplas to TGA dilution buffer to create a buffer containing 30% Octaplas.
      • 4. Use the 30% Octaplas mix to dilute reconstituted cephalin 1:50 to be used as a positive control.
      • 5. Rehydrate thrombosomes with cell culture grade water for 10 minutes then dilute with 30% Octaplas to 7,200 thrombosomes/μL.
      • 6. Using a multichannel pipette, add 20 μL of PRP reagent to each test well. Add 20 μL of Calibrator to each calibration well.
      • 7. Add 80 μL of sample to each test and calibration well. Add 80 μL of 30% Octaplas to negative control wells and 1:50 cephalin to positive control wells.
      • 8. Insert plate into tray and incubate for 10 minutes at 40° C. After incubation, dispense fluo-buffer and fluo-substrate mixture (including a fluorescent-labeled peptide, that when cleaved by thrombin, generates a fluorescent signal) into active wells.
      • 9. Read plate for 75 minutes at 20 s intervals to capture full thrombin generation profile.
  • TABLE 8
    Batch TPH (nM)
    1 61.5
    2 71.4
    3 67.8
    4 52.0
    5 60.2
    6 54.7
    7 54.4
    Mean 60.3
  • Data from these assays is summarized in Table 9.
  • TABLE 9
    TFF Batches
    Average CD62
    Average Average AV Positivity
    Average CD41 Positivity (0.5 μm-
    Batch TPH (nM) Positivity (0.5 μm-2.5 μm)1 2.5 μm)1
    Batch B 61.5 81.5 96.7 94.2
    Batch C 71.4 79.4 89.9 93.1
    Batch D 67.8 85.7 95.3 89.8
    Batch E 52.0 78.2 95.4 92.4
    Batch F 60.2 81.5 95.9 92.5
    Batch G 54.7 84.0 96.2 87.3
    Batch H 54.4 78.5 93.5 90.7
    Mean 60.3 81.3 94.7 91.4
    1Particle diameter as assessed using sizing beats on the flow cytometry forward scatter.
  • Example 7. 9F9 and PAC-1 Binding
  • Aggregation of activated platelets is mediated by the formation of the GPIIb/IIIa complex, which can bind to fibrinogen (also called Factor 1) and form a clot. GPIIb/IIIa is a platelet fibrinogen receptor also known as CD41/CD61 complex. In this process, ADP promotes the active form of the GPIIb/IIIa complex. Antibody 9F9 binds to fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane. The presence of fibrinogen on the cell membrane is thus indicative of thrombosomes capable of forming clots.
  • A vial of thrombosomes prepared according to Example 1 was rehydrated using 10 mL of deionized water. An aliquot of thrombosomes was diluted to a final concentration of 1×105 particles/μL using HMTA (HEPES Modified Tyrode's Albumin). Samples were prepared as shown in Table 11. Unstained samples were prepared by adding 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes to 20 μL of HMTA. FITC isotype control samples were prepared by adding 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes to 10 μL of the isotype control antibody (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 555748) and 10 μL of HMTA. Samples stained with 9F9 were prepared by adding 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes to 10 μL of the 9F9 antibody (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 340507 and 10 μL of HMTA. Samples stained with PAC-1 were prepared by adding 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes to 5 μL of the isotype control antibody and 15 μL of HMTA. All samples were prepared in duplicated using a total of 1×106 particles per reaction mixture. Samples were incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes away from open light. After incubation, all samples were diluted with 1 mL of HBS and acquired using the ACEA NovoCyte flow cytometer. The fluorescent signal generated by PAC-1 was used to determine the expression of activated GPIIb/IIIa receptors without bound fibrinogen. The fluorescent signal from 9F9 was used to determine binding of fibrinogen to the surface receptors on thrombosomes.
  • HTMA (HEPES modified Tyrode's albumin).
  • Concentration
    (mM, except where
    Component otherwise indicated)
    HEPES 9.5
    NaCl 145.0
    KCl 4.8
    NaHCO3 12.0
    Dextrose 5.0
    Bovine Serum Albumin 0.35% w/v
  • TABLE 10
    Unstained FITC Iso 9F9 PAC-1
    Cells (uL) 10 10 10 10
    HMTA (uL) 20 10 10 15
    Antibody (uL) 0 10 10 5
  • The samples were assayed by flow cytometry, and it was demonstrated that there is surface-bound fibrinogen post rehydration (FIG. 20 ), while the anti-PAC-1 antibody shows no significant binding (FIG. 21 ). This is further evidence that the thrombosomes prepared by TFF include fibrinogen bound to the active form of GPIIb/GPIIIa, as PAC-1 binds to the same complex.
  • Example 8. Evaluation of CD47 Binding
  • CD47 is a cell-surface marker used in self-recognition. Absence of this marker can, in some cases, lead to phagocytosis.
  • One vial of thrombosomes prepared as described in Example 1 was rehydrated with 10 mL sterile water for injection and stained with increasing volumes of anti-CD47 antibody conjugated to Pacific Blue (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 561564) or a corresponding isotype control (BD Biosciences Cat. No. 560373). All samples contained 1 million cells. This titration resulted in a maximum fluorescent signal that was ˜5× over background (FIG. 22A) and an overall CD47 positivity of ˜40% (Table 12). An exemplary histogram is shown in FIG. 22B.
  • Aliquots of CD47 antibody conjugated to V450 were prepared at a 1:10, 1:5, and 1:2 dilution with HMTA. The initial concentration of a thrombosome sample was determined using the AcT diff 2 and the concentration of a 1 mL aliquot was adjusted to 100×103 per using HMTA. TFF thrombosomes were stained in duplicate at each antibody dilution by adding 10 μL of antibody to 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes. Samples stained with undiluted antibody were generated in the same manner. Unstained control samples were made by adding 10 μL of HMTA to 10 μL of diluted thrombosomes. This sample preparation was repeated using an isotype control antibody in place of the anti-CD47. All samples were incubated at room temperature away from light for 20 minutes. After incubation samples were diluted with 500 of HBS and 15,000 events were acquired for each sample using the ACEA NovoCyte flow cytometer. V450 fluorescence in the test samples was used to assess antibody binding to CD47 on the thrombosome surface. V450 fluorescence of the isotype control samples was used to monitor nonspecific binding.
  • Table 11 shows the mean fluorescence intensity of samples with various amounts of antibody (anti-CD47 or isotype control).
  • TABLE 11
    Mean CD47 MFI (Batch C)
    Volume Antibody (μL) 0 2 4 10 20
    CD47-Pacific Blue 438 2229 2904 4141 5528
    IgG Isotype-Pacific Blue 438 536 591 771 1009
  • Table 12 shows the CD47 percent positivity at various concentrations of anti-CD47 antibody.
  • TABLE 12
    CD47 Percent Positive (Batch C)
    Volume
    Antibody
    0 20
    (μL) (Unstained) 2 4 10 (Undiluted)
    Rep 1 0.00% 11.89% 23.07% 36.51% 40.18%
    Rep
    2 0.00%  9.39% 18.24% 33.28% 38.43%
    Average 0.00% 10.64% 20.66% 34.90% 39.31%
  • A second vial of TFF thrombosomes from a different lot was rehydrated and stained with increasing volumes of anti-CD47 conjugated to Pacific Blue or a corresponding isotype control. All sampled contained 250,000 cells. Again, fluorescent signal that was ˜5× to 6× over background (FIG. 22C) and an overall CD47 positivity of ˜50% (Table 15). An exemplary histogram is shown in FIG. 22D.
  • A second round of testing was performed on a new TFF thrombosomes sample using an increased amount of antibody and decreased number of thrombosomes per sample in order to improve the intensity of the signal caused by anti-CD47 binding to the thrombosomes. The initial concentration of a thrombosome sample was determined using the AcT diff 2 and the concentration of a 1 mL aliquot was adjusted to 25×103 per μL using HMTA. Samples were stained in duplicate with increasing amounts of antibody according to Table 13 below. The final volume for each sample was held constant at 40 μL. The total number of thrombosomes in each sample was help constant at 250×103 per μL. This sample preparation was repeated using an isotype control antibody in place of the anti-CD47.
  • TABLE 13
    Volume Tsomes Volume AB (μL) Volume HMTA (μL) Total
    10 0 30 40
    10 5 25 40
    10 15 15 40
    10 25 5 40
    10 30 0 40
  • All samples were incubated at room temperature away from light for 20 minutes. After incubation samples were diluted with 500 μL of HBS 15,000 events were acquired for each sample using the ACEA NovoCyte flow cytometer. V450 fluorescence in the test samples was used to assess antibody binding to CD47 on the thrombosome surface. V450 fluorescence of the isotype control samples was used to monitor nonspecific binding.
  • Table 14 shows the mean fluorescence intensity of samples with various amounts of antibody (anti-CD47 or isotype control).
  • TABLE 14
    Mean CD47 MFI (Batch D)
    Volume Antibody (μL) 0 5 15 25 30
    Anti-CD47-Pacific 237 3340 5265 6222 6517
    Blue
    IgG Isotype-Pacific 232 548 889 1134 1383
    Blue
  • Table 15 shows the CD47 percent positivity at various concentrations of anti-CD47 antibody.
  • TABLE 15
    CD47 Percent Positivity (Batch D)
    Sample Unstained 5 uL 15 uL 25 uL 30 uL
    Rep
    1 0.00% 48.79% 49.73% 41.23% 38.21%
    Rep
    2 0.00% 42.29% 51.75% 38.64% 33.48%
    Average 0.00% 45.54% 50.74% 39.94% 35.85%
  • Example 9. Microparticle Content Reduction
  • The microparticle content of human in-date stored platelets (hIDSP) compared to thrombosomes prepared according to Example 1 (but not lyophilized) were compared using dynamic light scattering. The results are shown in FIGS. 23A-C and Table 16. FIGS. 23A-C are histograms that are normalized to a relative intensity so that the sum of the intensity of each data point equals 1.0. For example, if a particular data point has a y-axis value of 0.1 then it can be typically interpreted that the data point makes up 10% of the scattering intensity of the sample.
  • A pool of the apheresis units used to manufacture a batch of thrombosomes was made for analysis. This sample type is denoted as “hIDSP.” A 1 mL aliquot of this hIDSP (human In-Date Stored Platelets) pool was taken for dynamic light scattering (DLS; Thrombolux—Light Integra) analysis. A sample from this aliquot was then drawn into a capillary and inserted into the DLS instrument. The capillary sat in the instrument for 1 minute to allow the temperature and movement to equilibrate. The internal temperature of the machine is 37° C. After 1 minute of equilibration, the viscosity setting for the sample was chosen. The DLS instrument has a built-in viscosity setting for samples that are in plasma, such as apheresis units. This viscosity setting was used for hIDSP samples. The viscosity of this setting is 1.060 cP (centipoise). After the plasma viscosity setting was selected, the sample was analyzed. From the same hIDSP aliquot, a 2nd and 3rd sample were drawn into a capillary and analyzed with this hIDSP protocol, for triplicate analysis. Microparticle percentage was then determined from the data.
  • “Pre-Lyo” samples are an in-process sample from the thrombosomes manufacturing process. This sample type is the material taken right before lyophilization. A viscosity measurement of the sample was taken in order to analysis these samples with DLS. The viscometer (Rheosense μVISC) has a built-in oven that is used to bring the sample to the temperature of the DLS instrument (37° C.). Prior to viscosity analysis of the sample the oven must be heated to 37° C. To determine the viscosity of the pre-lyo sample a 400-350 μL sample was drawn into a syringe and inserted into the viscometer. After inserting the sample into the viscometer, the instrument temperature needs to reach 37° C. again. After the oven reaches 37° C. the sample was analyzed with all settings on AUTO except for “Measurement Volume” which was set to 400 μL. This viscosity was used for the DLS measurement of the same sample. A 1 mL aliquot of this pre-lyo sample was taken for dynamic light scattering (DLS; Thrombolux—LightIntegra) analysis. A sample from this aliquot was then drawn into a capillary and inserted into the DLS instrument. The capillary sat in the instrument for 1 minute to allow the temperature and movement to equilibrate. The internal temperature of the machine is 37° C. After 1 minute of equilibration, the previously measured viscosity was put into the viscosity setting of the DLS instrument. After the viscosity was entered, the sample was analyzed. From the same pre-lyo aliquot, a 2nd and 3rd sample were drawn into a capillary and analyzed with this Pre-Lyo Protocol, for triplicate analysis. Microparticle percentage was then determined from the data.
  • Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol and diluted 1:5 in a mixture of SeraSub (CST Technologies, Inc.) and ACD. The SeraSub/ACD diluent consists of a 1:9 dilution of ACD in SeraSub. 1 mL of the 1:5 dilution of thrombosomes was prepared for analysis by DLS. A sample of the thrombosomes dilution was drawn into the capillary and inserted into the DLS instrument. The capillary sat in the instrument for 1 minute to allow the temperature and movement to equilibrate. The internal temperature of the machine is 37° C. After 1 minute of equilibration, the viscosity setting for the sample was chosen. The viscosity used for the sample was 1.200 cP. After the viscosity was entered, the sample was analyzed. A 2nd, 3rd, and 4th sample were drawn into a capillary and analyzed with this thrombosomes protocol, for quadruplicate analysis. Microparticle percentage was then determined from the data (and platelet radius where applicable).
  • TABLE 16
    Batch Number hIDSP % MP Pre-Lyo % MP
    Batch J 9.47% 0.49%
    Batch K 7.55% 0.65%
    Batch L 7.73% 0.59%
    Average 8.25% 0.58%
  • In additional experiments, the microparticle content of human in-date stored platelets (hIDSP) compared to rehydrated thrombosomes prepared according to Example 1 were compared using dynamic light scattering (DLS). The results are shown in FIGS. 24A-C and Table 17.
  • TABLE 17
    Batch hIDSP Thrombosomes
    Number % MP % MP
    Batch D 7.43% 2.82%
    Batch E 5.95% 3.40%
    Batch F 12.39%  2.37%
    Average 8.59% 2.86%
  • Example 12. Metabolite Analysis
  • Table 18 shows an analysis of pH and metabolites present in the preparation of thrombosomes as described in Example 1, including analyses of the raw platelet material, after an initial dilution, after the platelet derivatives were concentrated, and after the end of the diafiltration process, as determined using an i-STAT handheld blood analyzer and CG4+ cartridges.
  • Platelet samples for iStat analysis were collected at different processing steps in small volumes (1 ml). The initial sample for iStat analysis named “Raw Material” was collected after the platelet donor units were pooled together but before any processing had occurred. Named “Initial Dilution”, The pooled platelet units were 1:1 diluted with Control Buffer before subjecting the platelets to TFF processing. At the end of the concentration phase of TFF, the “End of Conc” sample was drawn from the platelet product. After washing the cells, the “End of DV (Pre-Lyo)” sample was drawn as a representation of the product as it enters the lyophilizer.
  • TABLE 18
    Batch P
    Raw Initial End of DV
    iStat CG4+ Material Dilution End of Conc (Pre-Lyo)
    pH 7.6 7.5 7.4 7.1
    pCO2 (mmHg) 14.9 12.5 14.7 18
    pO2 (mmHg) 147 176 160 163
    HCO3 (mmol/L) 14.7 10 9.3 5.9
    TCO2 (mmol/L) 15 10 10 6
    sO2 (%) 100 100 100 99
    Lac (mmol/L) 6.14 2.97 2.6 0.55
  • Example 11. Pathogen Reduction
  • The reduction of pathogens is generally desirable in blood products. One method of pathogen reduction involves the use of a photosensitive nucleic acid-intercalating compound to alter the nucleic acids of pathogens upon illumination with an appropriate wavelength.
  • The INTERCEPT® system (made by Cerus) uses amotosalen, a nucleic acid intercalating compound that forms cross-links in nucleic acid upon illumination with UVA. Exemplary parameters for use of this system are shown in Table 19, and a schematic of the system is shown in FIG. 25A, while exemplary process data are shown in FIGS. 25B-C for 2.6 L of processed material in 198 minutes (approx. 14/min average).
  • DLS was performed as described in Example 9.
  • TABLE 19
    Process Parameter Specification
    Feed Pump 600 ml/min
    (3/8″ Tube)
    Retentate Pressure Target = 4 to 6 PSI
    Criteria = 2 to 8 PSI
    Buffer Pump
    100 ml/min (noncritical)
    DiaVolumes X2 DVs
    Concentration Factor ~4 (from initial dilution)
  • Exemplary comparative data of pH and metabolites of thrombosomes prepared as in Example 1, with or without treatment with the INTERCEPT® system is shown in Table 20.
  • TABLE 20
    iSTAT Raw Material Initial Dilution End of Con End of DV (Pre-Lyo)
    CG4+ Control Treated Control Treated Control Treated Control Treated
    pH 7.2 7.2 7.3 7.1 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.2
    pCO2 32.9 25.7 16.5 29.1 16.1 14.4 11.3 12.4
    (mmHg)
    pO2 67 149 167 150 142 155 145 153
    (mmHg)
    HCO3 12.7 10.2 8.5 8.1 7.8 6.7 5.8 5.1
    (mmol/L)
    TCO2 14 11 9 9 8 7 6 5
    (mmol/L)
    sO2 (%) 89 99 99 98 99 99 99 99
    Lac 6.56 6.75 3.26 3.33 2.80 2.50 0.91 1.19
    (mmol/L)
  • Exemplary comparative data of functional characterization (AcT count and aggregation parameters) and cell-surface markers are shown in Tables 21 (hIDSPs), 22 (prior to lyophilization) and Table 23 (following lyophilization and rehydration in 10 mL sterile water for injection to a concentration of approximately 1.8×106/μL (individual sample counts are shown in Table 23).
  • TABLE 21
    Raw Material (hIDSP)
    Batch M Batch N
    “Control” “Treated”
    AcT Counts AVG (×10{circumflex over ( )}3) 1212 1120
    Aggregation (%) Collagen AVG 22 21
    Plasma-A. Acid AVG 75 84
    250k Thrombin AVG 97 97
    Buffer-A. Acid AVG 94 92
    Flow (percent CD41 93.5 97.6
    positivity) CD42 91.4 95.8
    DoublePositive % 92.0 95.6
    CD62 23.9 42.5
    AV5 3.8 8.4
  • TABLE 22
    Pre-Lyophilization
    Batch M Batch N
    “Control” “Treated”
    AcT Counts AVG (×10{circumflex over ( )}3) 1787 2057
    Aggregation (%) Collagen AVG 81 82
    Plasma-A. Acid AVG 93 84
    250k Thrombin AVG 97 90
    Buffer-A. Acid AVG 89 95
    Flow (percent CD41 98.4 97.0
    positivity) CD42 98.2 95.4
    DoublePositive % 97.5 94.3
    CD62 26.7 41.6
    AV5 10.6 13.7
  • TABLE 23
    Final Product QC
    Batch M
    “Control” Batch N
    V1 V2 V1
    AcT Counts AVG (×10{circumflex over ( )}3) 1765 1767 1720
    Aggregation (%) 375K Thrombin 84 66 74
    Flow (percent CD41 85.5 79.5 91.2
    positivity) CD42 85.1 79.2 90.6
    Double Positive % 84.6 78.8 90.1
    CD62 87.0 93.2 87.1
    AV5 95.4 95.0 92.6
    TGA 4.8K TPH 72.3 71.5 74.8
    Residual Plasma % 7.0% 8.4%
  • The microparticle content at various stages of the preparation of thrombosomes was also determined as described in Example 9. FIGS. 26A-B show the similarity of rehydrated thrombosomes prepared with and without pathogen reduction treatment. A summary of these data is shown in Table 24. FIG. 27A shows the microparticle content of hiDSPs with or without pathogen reduction treatment. FIGS. 27B-C compare the microparticle content of the hiDSPs shown in FIG. 29A and rehydrated thrombosomes prepared therefrom. A summary of these data is shown in Table 25. FIG. 28A shows the microparticle content of hiDSPs with or without pathogen reduction treatment. FIGS. 28B-C compare the microparticle content of the hiDSPs shown in FIG. 28A and rehydrated thrombosomes prepared therefrom. A summary of these data is shown in Table 26.
  • TABLE 24
    Batch % MP Particle Radius (nm)
    (Untreated) 3.82% 1085
    Batch M
    (Cerus Treated) 3.37% 1190
    Batch N
    (Untreated) 2.77% 1184
    Batch J
    (Cerus Treated) 3.19% 1164
    Batch K
  • TABLE 25
    Batch % MP
    hIDSP 6.75%
    Batch M
    (Untreated)
    Thrombosomes 3.82%
    Batch M
    (Untreated)
    hIDSP 6.25%
    Batch N
    (Treated)
    Thrombosomes 3.37%
    Batch N
    (Treated)
  • TABLE 26
    Batch % MP
    hIDSP 9.47%
    Batch J
    (Untreated)
    Thrombosomes 2.77%
    Batch J
    (Untreated)
    hIDSP 7.55%
    Batch K
    (Treated)
    Thrombosomes 3.19%
    Batch K
    (Treated)
  • Example 12. Interactions Between Platelets and Thrombosomes
  • In this Example, ‘platelets’ are platelets isolated from citrated whole blood approximately 3 hours post-collection. The thrombosomes are Batch D, prepared by the method described in Example 1. Table 27 is a sample layout for the experiments in this Example.
  • TABLE 27
    Portion of Portion of
    Volume Volume Count Count Total
    Platelets Tsomes Platelets Tsomes Count
    (μL) (μL) (*103/μL) (*103/μL) (*103/μL)
    Platelets 600 0 237 0 237
    Only
    Tsomes
    0 600 0 204 204
    Only
    9:1 540 60 213 20 233
    4:1 480 120 190 41 231
    2:1 400 200 158 68 226
    1:1 300 300 119 102 221
    1:2 200 400 79 136 215
    1:4 120 480 47 163 210
  • Platelet and thrombosome co-aggregation was evaluated by light transmission aggregometry. Platelets and thrombosomes were coincubated and evaluated by aggregometry+/−platelet activation with 4β-Phorbol-12-myristate-13-acetate (PMA). For fresh-drawn platelets isolated from whole blood, 100 ng/mL PMA was used. For stored platelets (i.e. apheresis platelets) 1000 ng/mL PMA was used.
  • Fresh platelets were isolated from ACD anticoagulated whole blood, washed, and diluted to 250,000 cells/μL in HMTA. Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol and diluted to 250,000 cells/μL in HMTA. An aliquot each of platelets in HMTA and Thrombosomes in HMTA were mixed in equal proportions. Platelets, Thrombosomes, and the mixed sample were evaluated by light transmission aggregometry (Helena AggRAM) in response to phorbol-myristate-acetate (PMA; 100 ng/mL) activation. The mixed samples were evaluated with and without a stir bar to assess the effect of stirring-induced shear on observed platelet-Thrombosomes coaggregation.
  • FIG. 29A shows the transmittance of the samples in Table 27, with and without agonist. Plus shear and minus agonist (black) mixing, thrombosomes and fresh-drawn platelets induced platelet activation and aggregation. PMA (gray) activated platelets and the magnitude of Δtransmittance suggests mixed aggregation with thrombosomes. Without shear there is either no activation or co-aggregation to less than the magnitude observed in FIG. 29A.
  • The platelet and thrombosomes AcT counts pre- and post-aggregometry were also evaluated. FIG. 29B shows the post-aggregation counts. Cases for which the white bar is greater than the other(s) suggest incorporation of thrombosomes into platelet aggregates. The absolute decrease in particle count for the no agonist cases (black) is especially dramatic and unexpected.
  • The effect of shear on aggregation was also evaluated. Mixed aggregometry (1:1 platelets: thrombosomes by count) was repeated with and without stir bars. Results are shown in FIG. 29C. These results show that shear is necessary for observable coaggregation in the absence of a platelet agonist. The magnitude of measured counts and co-aggregation+/−agonist is slightly decreased in plasma vs buffer.
  • Example 13. Inhibition of Fibrin Trapping with GPRP
  • In this Example, ‘platelets’ are isolated from whole blood approximately 1 hour post-collection. The thrombosomes are Batch H, prepared by the method described in Example 1.
  • Fresh platelets were isolated from ACD anticoagulated whole blood, washed, and diluted to 250,000 cells/μL in HMTA. Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol and diluted to 250,000 cells/μL in HMTA. An aliquot each of platelets in HMTA and thrombosomes in HMTA were mixed in equal proportions. Each group of platelets, thrombosomes, or mixed suspensions were divided equally; one group was treated with 1 mM GPRP to inhibit fibrin polymerization and one group remained untreated. The peptide Gly-Pro-Arg-Pro (GPRP; Sigma-Aldrich item G1895) is a peptide that prevents fibrin polymerization. Platelets, thrombosomes, and the mixed samples were evaluated by light transmission aggregometry (Helena AggRAM) in response to thrombin (2.5 U/mL) activation.
  • FIG. 30 shows the results of co-aggregation experiments using platelets, thrombosomes, and 2:1 and 1:1 mixtures of platelets and thrombosomes, all activated with thrombin, either in the presence or absence of GPRP (1 mM). In the mixed cases, total measured aggregation decreased as the thrombosome population increased, suggesting that the interaction of platelets and thrombosomes is partly caused by fibrin trapping. However, the bulk of the co-aggregation interaction was platelet-mediated, and not reliant on fibrin trapping as evidenced by high measured aggregation even with GPRP.
  • Examples 12-13 show that platelets and thrombosomes co-aggregated under shear with (and to a lesser extent, without) platelet activation. The fibrin polymerization inhibitor GPRP only slightly inhibited platelet-thrombosomes co-aggregation following thrombin activation.
  • Example 14. RGDS Inhibition of Co-Aggregation
  • In this Example, ‘platelets’ are isolated from whole blood approximately 1 hour post-collection. The thrombosomes are Batch H, prepared by the method described in Example 1.
  • Fresh platelets were isolated from ACD anticoagulated whole blood, washed, and diluted to 250,000 cells/μL in HMTA. Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol and diluted to 250,000 cells/μL in HMTA. An aliquot each of platelets in HMTA and thrombosomes in HMTA were mixed in equal proportions. Each group of platelets, thrombosomes, or mixed suspensions were divided equally; one group was treated with 100 RGDS to inhibit fibrinogen binding to platelets and one group remained untreated. RGDS (Arg-Gly-Asp-Ser; Cayman Chemical item 15359) is a peptide sequence that binds platelet surface integrins, particularly GPIIb/IIIa. It inhibits platelet binding to fibrinogen and other adhesive proteins. Platelets, thrombosomes, and the mixed samples were evaluated by light transmission aggregometry in response to phorbol myristate-acetate (PMA; 100 ng/mL) activation.
  • Co-aggregation experiments were performed with 100 μM RGDS and activation with PMA to investigate whether the interaction is caused by fibrinogen bridging between platelets and thrombosomes. Results are shown in FIG. 31 . RGDS blocks >50% of measured co-aggregation, suggesting the interaction between platelets and thrombosomes may be caused in a large part by fibrinogen binding.
  • Examples 12-14 show that thrombosomes readily co-aggregate with activated platelets (e.g., as evidenced by light transmission aggregometry). Spontaneous co-aggregation is induced by shear. Platelet-thrombosomes interactions are apparent in both buffer and plasma. While co-aggregation is not substantially inhibited by GPRP, co-aggregation is substantially inhibited by RGDS. This suggests a key role for active platelet-fibrinogen binding in the co-aggregation mechanism and that co-aggregation is not caused only by passive fibrin trapping.
  • Example 15. Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM)
  • A 10 mL aliquot of rehydrated thrombosomes were centrifuged at 2000 RPM for 30 minutes. The supernatant of the centrifuges sample was removed down to 1 mL and discarded. The sample was gently agitated to resuspend the Thrombosomes. The concentrated thrombosomes were treated with 3% glutaraldehyde in 0.1 M cacodylate buffer at a pH of 7.4 for 2 hours with agitation every 15 minutes. The thrombosomes were rinsed with sterile water three times and transferred to a 1% solution of osmium tetroxide for 1 hour with agitation every 15 minutes. The sample was then rinsed three more times with sterile water and a 0.5 mL droplet was transferred to a polysulfone filter membrane. The mounted sample was frozen with liquid nitrogen and dried under vacuum before being gold sputtered and imaged using scanning electron microscopy.
  • FIGS. 32A-D show SEM of platelets and human thrombosomes. Fresh activated platelets are shown in FIG. 32A (scale bar=2 μm) and FIG. 32B (scale bar=1 μm). Rehydrated human thrombosomes prepared as in Example 1 are shown in FIG. 32C (scale bar=2 μm) and FIG. 32D (scale bar=1 μm).
  • Example 16. T-TAS® Thrombosome Data
  • In the Total Thrombus-formation Analysis System (T-TAS®, FUJIMORI KOGYO CO., LTD), the sample is forced through collagen-coated microchannels using mineral oil. Changes in pressure are used to assess thrombus formation. The Occlusion Start Time is time it takes to reach MO kPa, and the Occlusion Time=time it takes to each 480 kPa using an AR chip (Zacros Item No, TC0101).
  • According to FUJIMORI KOGYO CO., LTD, an AR chip can be used for analyzing the formation of a mixed white thrombus consisting chiefly of fibrin and activated platelets. It has a flow path (300 μm wide by 50 μm high) coated with collagen and tissue factors and can be used to analyze the clotting function and platelet function. In comparison, a PL chip can be used for analyzing the formation of a platelet thrombus consisting chiefly of activated platelets. A PL chip has a flow path coated with collagen only and can be used to analyze the platelet function.
  • T-TAS® reagents (CaCTI, AR Chip) were warmed to 37° C. and Thrombosomes were rehydrated according to standard protocol. An aliquot of the rehydrated Thrombosomes was washed by centrifugation at 3900 g×10 minutes and resuspended to approximately 300,000 cells/μL in sodium citrate anticoagulated platelet-poor plasma (PPP). CaCTI (20 μL) was mixed with Thrombosomes in PPP (480 μL) and run through the T-TAS AR Chip under high shear. Pressure in the system was monitored over 30 minutes or until the maximum backpressure in the channel was achieved.
  • The T-TAS® instrument was prepared for use according to the manufacturer's instructions. AR Chips (Diapharma Cat. #TC0101) and AR Chip Calcium Corn Trypsin Inhibitor (CaCTI; Diapharma Cat. #TR0101) were warmed to room temperature. 300 uL of rehydrated thrombosomes were transferred to a 1.7 mL microcentrifuge tube and centrifuged at 3900 g×10 minutes to pellet. The thrombosomes pellet was resuspended in George King (GK) pooled normal human plasma or autologous plasma with or without autologous platelets to a concentration of approximately 100,000-450,000/uL, as determined by AcT counts (Beckman Coulter AcT Diff 2 Cell Counter). 20 uL of CaCTI with 480 uL of thrombosomes sample in GK plasma were mixed with gentle pipetting. The sample was loaded and run on the T-TAS® according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Table 28 shows T-TAS® results from citrated whole blood, platelet-reduced citrated whole blood supplemented with varying concentrations of thrombosomes as prepared in Example 1, and George King Platelet Poor Plasma (GK PPP) supplemented with varying concentrations of thrombosomes as prepared in Example 1 in experiments run according to the manufacturer's instructions using the AR chip and High Shear instrument settings.
  • TABLE 28
    T-TAS AR Chip Results
    Actual Tsome Base Occlusion Occlusion Occlusion
    Concentration Pressure Start Time Time Speed Area Under
    Sample Type (×10{circumflex over ( )}3/μL) (kPa) (hh:mm:ss) (hh:mm:ss) (kPa/min) Curve
    Citrated
     0 3.2 0:11:19 0:14:03 25.6 1393.9
    Whole Blood
    Platelet
     0 3.3 0:12:41 0:16:57 16.4 1180.6
    Reduced 73 3.2 0:11:11 0:13:47 26.9 1380.9
    Citrated 173  3.4 0:09:37 0:13:22 18.7 1498.5
    Whole Blood 255  3.4 0:08:36 0:10:40 33.9 1653.1
    GK PPP  0 2.7 0:25:34 0:00:00 0 138.8
    45 2.8 0:27:22 0:28:48 48.8 190.6
    193* 2.9 0:12:41 0:00:00 0 775.3
    384  2.8 0:10:54 0:12:20 48.8 1479.8
    *Test peaked at ~75 kPa before rapidly dropping off. Possible erroneous result.
    Test timed out.
  • Time-elapsed results are shown in FIGS. 33A-B. Increasing the concentration of thrombosomes in platelet-reduced whole blood promoted more robust thrombus formation as measured by shortened occlusion times (FIG. 33A). Increasing the concentration of Thrombosomes in platelet poor plasma (PPP) promoted more robust thrombus formation as measured by shortened occlusion times (FIG. 33B).
  • The effect of GPRP (1 mM) on occlusion activity was also assayed. Table 29 shows T-TAS® results for platelet-poor plasma, with and without thrombosomes in the presence and absence of GPRP. Adding GPRP to prevent fibrinogen formation did not prevent the thrombosome-containing sample from reaching occlusion pressure. While the addition of GPRP to thrombosome samples in plasma prevents the formation of fibrin in the microcapillary channel (FIGS. 33C (no GPRP) and 33D (GPRP), both in GK PPP), the addition of GPRP to thrombosomes (PPP) did not prevent thrombus formation (FIG. 33E).
  • TABLE 29
    AR Chip: GPRP Comparison
    Actual Tsome Base Occlusion Occlusion Occlusion
    Concentration Pressure Start Time Time Speed Area Under
    Sample Type (×10{circumflex over ( )}3/μL) (kPa) (hh:mm:ss) (hh:mm:ss) (kPa/min) Curve
    GK PPP (No 0 2.7 0:25:34 0:00:00 0 138.8
    Tsomes)
    GK PPP + 1 mM 0 3.5 0:00:00 0:00:00 0 52.43
    GPRP (No Tsomes)
    GK PPP + 375k 384 2.8 0:10:54 0:12:20 48.8 1479.8
    Tsomes
    GK PPP + 375k 380 3.2 0:10:09 0:14:32 16 1426.9
    Tsomes with 1 mM
    GPRP
    Test timed out
  • While the embodiments of the invention are amenable to various modifications and alternative forms, specific embodiments have been shown by way of example in the drawings and are described in detail below. The intention, however, is not to limit the invention to the particular embodiments described. On the contrary, the invention is intended to cover all modifications, equivalents, and alternatives falling within the scope of the invention as defined by the appended claims.

Claims (22)

What is claimed is:
1. A process for preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, the process comprising:
tangential flow filtration (TFF) of a starting material comprising platelets, a diluted starting material comprising platelets, a concentrated platelet composition, or a combination thereof, thereby preparing a composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and aqueous medium,
wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than or equal to 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
2. The process of claim 1, further comprising a pathogen reduction step.
3. The process of claim 1, wherein the starting material has a protein concentration of about 60 to about 80 mg/mL.
4. The process of claim 1, wherein TFF comprises diafiltering with a preparation agent comprising a buffering agent comprising HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid), a base comprising sodium bicarbonate, and a loading agent comprising trehalose, polysucrose, or a combination thereof.
5. The process of claim 1, wherein the preparation agent comprises an organic solvent comprising ethanol, DMSO, or a combination thereof.
6. The process of claim 1, wherein the protein concentration of the aqueous medium is less than or equal to 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
7. The process of claim 1, wherein the protein concentration of the aqueous medium is about 7% to about 10% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
8. The process of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises less than 5.0% (by scattering intensity) microparticles.
9. The process of claim 1, further comprising lyophilizing and/or cryopreserving the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
10. The process of claim 1, further comprising thermally treating the composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives.
11. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD41 percent positivity of at least 55%.
12. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a CD42 percent positivity of at least 80%.
13. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have an annexin V percent positivity of at least 70%.
14. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD47 percent positivity of at least 8%.
15. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have CD62 percent positivity of at least 80%.
16. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have fibrinogen associated with the cell membrane.
17. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of about 4.8×103 particles/μL generate a thrombin peak height (TPH) of at least 25 nM when in the presence of a reagent containing tissue factor and phospholipids.
18. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives, when at a concentration of at least about 70×103 particles/μL, produce an occlusion time of less than 14 minutes in a total thrombus-formation analysis system (T-TAS) assay.
19. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelets or platelet derivatives have a potency of at least 1.5 thrombin generation potency units (TGPU) per 106 particles.
20. The process of claim 1, wherein the platelet derivatives comprise thrombosomes.
21. The process of claim 1, wherein the composition is:
a) negative for HLA Class I antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test;
b) negative for HLA Class II antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test;
c) negative for HNA antibodies based on a regulatory agency approved test; or
d) one or more of a), b), and c).
22. A composition comprising platelets or platelet derivatives and an aqueous medium, wherein the aqueous medium has a protein concentration less than or equal to 50% of the protein concentration of donor apheresis plasma.
US18/341,700 2019-05-03 2023-06-26 Materials and methods for producing blood products Pending US20230356150A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/341,700 US20230356150A1 (en) 2019-05-03 2023-06-26 Materials and methods for producing blood products

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201962843061P 2019-05-03 2019-05-03
US201962936122P 2019-11-15 2019-11-15
US16/865,215 US11529587B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2020-05-01 Materials and methods for producing blood products
US18/056,220 US11752468B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2022-11-16 Materials and methods for producing blood products
US18/341,700 US20230356150A1 (en) 2019-05-03 2023-06-26 Materials and methods for producing blood products

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/056,220 Continuation US11752468B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2022-11-16 Materials and methods for producing blood products

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230356150A1 true US20230356150A1 (en) 2023-11-09

Family

ID=73017071

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/865,215 Active 2041-06-08 US11529587B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2020-05-01 Materials and methods for producing blood products
US18/056,220 Active US11752468B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2022-11-16 Materials and methods for producing blood products
US18/099,796 Active US11813572B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2023-01-20 Materials and methods for producing blood products
US18/341,700 Pending US20230356150A1 (en) 2019-05-03 2023-06-26 Materials and methods for producing blood products

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/865,215 Active 2041-06-08 US11529587B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2020-05-01 Materials and methods for producing blood products
US18/056,220 Active US11752468B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2022-11-16 Materials and methods for producing blood products
US18/099,796 Active US11813572B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2023-01-20 Materials and methods for producing blood products

Country Status (12)

Country Link
US (4) US11529587B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3962499A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2022532262A (en)
KR (1) KR20220016092A (en)
CN (1) CN114072159A (en)
AU (2) AU2020267368B2 (en)
BR (1) BR112021021984A2 (en)
CA (1) CA3138529A1 (en)
IL (1) IL287716A (en)
NZ (1) NZ782598A (en)
SG (1) SG11202112054WA (en)
WO (1) WO2020227149A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11965178B2 (en) 2018-11-30 2024-04-23 Cellphire, Inc. Platelets loaded with anti-cancer agents

Families Citing this family (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11767511B2 (en) 2018-11-30 2023-09-26 Cellphire, Inc. Platelets as delivery agents
US11529587B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2022-12-20 Cellphire, Inc. Materials and methods for producing blood products
CA3147618A1 (en) * 2019-07-17 2021-01-21 Cellphire, Inc. Use of platelets in treating infections
AU2020334903B2 (en) 2019-08-16 2023-12-21 Cellphire, Inc. Thrombosomes as an antiplatelet agent reversal agent
CA3170201A1 (en) 2020-02-04 2021-08-12 Cellphire, Inc. Methods of treating congenital hemophilia with anti-fibrinolytic loaded platelets
WO2022178191A1 (en) * 2021-02-17 2022-08-25 Cellphire, Inc. Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating anticoagulant-induced coagulopathy
WO2022178177A1 (en) * 2021-02-17 2022-08-25 Cellphire, Inc. Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet-induced coagulopathy
EP4326850A1 (en) * 2021-04-20 2024-02-28 Retham Technologies, LLC Methods for maintaining long-term platelet viability and activatability
WO2023081804A1 (en) * 2021-11-04 2023-05-11 Cellphire, Inc. Platelet derivative compositions, and methods of making and using such compositions
WO2023220739A1 (en) 2022-05-12 2023-11-16 Cellphire, Inc. Platelet derivative compositions for use in subjects afflicted with hermansky pudlak syndrome or bernard soulier syndrome
CN115462369B (en) * 2022-09-29 2023-09-22 安徽省立医院(中国科学技术大学附属第一医院) Vitrification frozen exosome preservation method
WO2024192173A1 (en) 2023-03-14 2024-09-19 Cellphire, Inc. Hla-characterized platelet derivative compositions, and methods of making, selecting and using such compositions

Family Cites Families (206)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3932943A (en) 1970-08-14 1976-01-20 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method of preparation of lyophilized biological products
US3928566A (en) 1970-08-14 1975-12-23 Du Pont Lyophilized biological products
DE2546166A1 (en) 1975-10-15 1977-04-28 Behringwerke Ag TANNED THROMBOCYTE
US4059967A (en) 1976-02-19 1977-11-29 The Community Blood Council Of Greater New York, Inc. Process for freezing blood platelets
US4455299A (en) 1981-11-20 1984-06-19 Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Storage of blood platelets
US4481189A (en) 1982-04-14 1984-11-06 New York Blood Center Inc. Process for preparing sterilized plasma and plasma derivatives
US4670013A (en) 1982-12-27 1987-06-02 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Container for blood and blood components
US4865871A (en) 1983-08-23 1989-09-12 Board Of Regents The University Of Texas System Method for cryopreparing biological tissue
US5185160A (en) 1984-06-21 1993-02-09 Prp, Inc. Platelet membrane microvesicles
GB2248777B (en) 1984-11-29 1993-06-30 Curatech Inc Wound healing agents comprising platelet-derived growth and angiogenesis factors
US5213814A (en) 1989-04-10 1993-05-25 Cryopharm Corporation Lyophilized and reconstituted blood platelet compositions
US5958670A (en) 1988-05-18 1999-09-28 Cobe Laboratories, Inc. Method of freezing cells and cell-like materials
US4994367A (en) 1988-10-07 1991-02-19 East Carolina University Extended shelf life platelet preparations and process for preparing the same
US5059518A (en) 1988-10-20 1991-10-22 Coulter Corporation Stabilized lyophilized mammalian cells and method of making same
WO1990005461A1 (en) 1988-11-18 1990-05-31 Tosoh Corporation Process for purifying blood plasma
US5332578A (en) 1989-04-14 1994-07-26 Prp, Inc. Platelet membrane microparticles
CA2051092C (en) 1990-09-12 2002-07-23 Stephen A. Livesey Method and apparatus for cryopreparation, dry stabilization and rehydration of biological suspensions
EP0510185B1 (en) 1990-11-07 1996-12-11 Baxter International Inc. Blood platelet storage medium
WO1992009301A1 (en) 1990-11-27 1992-06-11 The American National Red Cross Tissue sealant and growth factor containing compositions that promote accelerated wound healing
GB9114202D0 (en) 1991-07-01 1991-08-21 Quadrant Holdings Cambridge Blood products
CA2128527A1 (en) 1992-01-21 1993-07-22 Raymond P. Goodrich, Jr. Method of freezing cells and cell-like materials
US5423738A (en) 1992-03-13 1995-06-13 Robinson; Thomas C. Blood pumping and processing system
DE69333924T2 (en) 1992-05-29 2006-08-17 University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill In the immobilized state dried pharmaceutically acceptable human platelets
EP0701455B1 (en) 1993-06-04 2001-03-14 Biotime, Inc. Plasma-like solution
US5656498A (en) 1994-02-22 1997-08-12 Nippon Telegraph And Telephone Corporation Freeze-dried blood cells, stem cells and platelets, and manufacturing method for the same
JP3788522B2 (en) 1994-02-22 2006-06-21 日本電信電話株式会社 Method for producing freeze-dried products of blood cells, stem cells, and platelets
US5656598A (en) 1994-03-08 1997-08-12 Rhone-Poulenc Rorer Pharmaceuticals Inc. Use of fibroblast growth factors to stimulate bone growth
US5759542A (en) 1994-08-05 1998-06-02 New England Deaconess Hospital Corporation Compositions and methods for the delivery of drugs by platelets for the treatment of cardiovascular and other diseases
US5919614A (en) 1994-10-19 1999-07-06 Lifecell Corporation Composition comprising three platelet lesion inhibitors for platelet storage
US5622867A (en) 1994-10-19 1997-04-22 Lifecell Corporation Prolonged preservation of blood platelets
US20010046487A1 (en) 1994-12-30 2001-11-29 Roser Bruce J. Methods for loading platelets, stabilizing platelets for dry storage and compositions obtained thereby
US5736313A (en) 1995-10-20 1998-04-07 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Method of lyophilizing platelets by incubation with high carbohydrate concentrations and supercooling prior to freezing
CA2256333A1 (en) 1996-05-29 1997-12-04 Victor Bronshtein Long-term shelf preservation by vitrification
DE19634313A1 (en) 1996-08-24 1998-02-26 Behringwerke Ag Method for stabilizing platelets
US5827741A (en) 1996-11-19 1998-10-27 The Regents Of The University Of California Cryopreservation of human adult and fetal pancreatic cells and human platelets
US5817381A (en) 1996-11-13 1998-10-06 Agricultural Utilization Research Institute Cellulose fiber based compositions and film and the process for their manufacture
CN1246778A (en) * 1997-02-07 2000-03-08 扇形支撑剑桥有限公司 Method and compositions for producing dried, storage-stable platelets
US6139878A (en) 1998-04-27 2000-10-31 Aventis Behring, Llc Method for preparing a diafiltered stabilized blood product
EP1131091B1 (en) 1998-11-20 2003-04-02 Eli Lilly And Company Treatment of viral hemorrhagic fever with protein c
ATE253935T1 (en) 1999-01-28 2003-11-15 Univ Texas INCREASING CIRCULATIVE PLATELETS WITH THROMBOPOIETIN COMPOSITIONS
WO2001007921A2 (en) 1999-07-23 2001-02-01 Medical Analysis Systems, Inc. Stabilized coagulation control reagent
US7033603B2 (en) 1999-08-06 2006-04-25 Board Of Regents The University Of Texas Drug releasing biodegradable fiber for delivery of therapeutics
JP4859317B2 (en) 1999-08-06 2012-01-25 ボード・オブ・リージエンツ,ザ・ユニバーシテイ・オブ・テキサス・システム Drug release biodegradable fiber implant
US6211575B1 (en) 1999-08-18 2001-04-03 Sigmatel Inc. Method and apparatus for identifying customized integrated circuits
JP2003512392A (en) 1999-11-12 2003-04-02 クワッドラント・ヘルスケア・(ユーケイ)・リミテッド Platelet stabilization method
US7208265B1 (en) 1999-11-24 2007-04-24 Xy, Inc. Method of cryopreserving selected sperm cells
ITAL990010U1 (en) 1999-12-14 2001-06-14 Maria Cristina Sacchi NEW LABORATORY METHOD FOR PREPARING GEL AND PLATE MEMBRANES OBTAINED FROM THE PLATE CONCENTRATE.
CA2397362A1 (en) 2000-02-10 2001-08-16 The Regents Of The University Of California Therapeutic platelets and methods
US20040152964A1 (en) 2000-02-10 2004-08-05 Crowe John H. Method and therapeutic platelets
US20040185524A1 (en) 2000-02-10 2004-09-23 Crowe John H. Biological samples and method for increasing survival of biological samples
US6770478B2 (en) 2000-02-10 2004-08-03 The Regents Of The University Of California Erythrocytic cells and method for preserving cells
US20020076445A1 (en) 2000-02-10 2002-06-20 Crowe John H. Eukaryotic cells and method for preserving cells
US20040147024A1 (en) 2000-02-10 2004-07-29 Crowe John H. Therapeutic platelets and methods
US7696168B2 (en) 2000-04-21 2010-04-13 Tufts Medical Center, Inc. G protein coupled receptor agonists and antagonists and methods of activating and inhibiting G protein coupled receptors using the same
WO2001089431A1 (en) 2000-05-22 2001-11-29 Coffey Arthur C Combination sis and vacuum bandage and method
US6653062B1 (en) 2000-07-26 2003-11-25 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Preservation and storage medium for biological materials
ATE445418T1 (en) 2000-10-19 2009-10-15 Bracco Imaging Spa RADIOPHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS
US20050222029A1 (en) 2001-01-04 2005-10-06 Myriad Genetics, Incorporated Compositions and methods for treating diseases
EP1456345B1 (en) 2001-08-22 2016-07-20 Maxcyte, Inc. Apparatus and method for electroporation of biological samples
EP1446148A1 (en) 2001-11-09 2004-08-18 Novo Nordisk A/S Pharmaceutical composition comprising a factor vii polypeptide and epsilon-aminocapronic acid
US20040136974A1 (en) 2002-01-16 2004-07-15 Crowe John H. Therapeutic platelets and methods
JP2003238174A (en) 2002-02-15 2003-08-27 Asahi Glass Co Ltd Method for manufacturing float glass
EP1501582A4 (en) 2002-04-24 2009-03-25 Interpore Orthopaedics Inc Blood separation and concentration system
CA2499463A1 (en) 2002-11-08 2004-05-27 The Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Compositions and methods for prolonging survival of platelets
AU2003304289A1 (en) 2002-11-29 2005-01-21 The Regents Of The University Of California A method and therapeutic platelets
WO2004050896A2 (en) 2002-11-29 2004-06-17 The Regents Of The University Of California A method and therapeutic platelets
GB0305133D0 (en) 2003-03-06 2003-04-09 Sinvent As Product
US7294455B2 (en) 2003-05-16 2007-11-13 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Fixed-dried platelets cross-linked to protein
US20050048460A1 (en) 2003-05-29 2005-03-03 The Regents Of The University Of California Preservative and method for preserving cells
US20060200100A1 (en) 2003-06-18 2006-09-07 Rosati Coni F Method and apparatus for supplying gas to an area
JP2005053841A (en) 2003-08-05 2005-03-03 Kyouto Biomedical Science:Kk Skin care preparation for external use
DE10335833A1 (en) 2003-08-05 2005-03-03 Curevac Gmbh Transfection of blood cells with mRNA for immune stimulation and gene therapy
WO2005020893A2 (en) 2003-08-06 2005-03-10 The Regents Of The University Of California Therapeutic platelets and methods
GB0323378D0 (en) 2003-10-07 2003-11-05 Univ Leicester Therapeutic agent
US20050181978A1 (en) 2003-11-20 2005-08-18 Rasmus Rojkjaer Therapeutic use of factor XI
WO2005065242A2 (en) 2003-12-29 2005-07-21 Am Biosolutions Method of treating cancer using platelet releasate
US20050191286A1 (en) 2004-02-09 2005-09-01 Gandy James B. Lyophilized platelet rich plasma for the use in wound healing (chronic or acute) and bone or tissue grafts or repair
CA2563904A1 (en) 2004-02-18 2005-08-25 Plasma Ventures Pty Ltd Isolated plasma and method for hyperimmunisation and plasma collection
US7811558B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2010-10-12 Cellphire, Inc. Use of stabilized platelets as hemostatic agent
US20060051731A1 (en) 2004-08-12 2006-03-09 David Ho Processes for preparing lyophilized platelets
WO2006020773A2 (en) * 2004-08-12 2006-02-23 Adlyfe, Inc. Methods for preparing freeze-dried platelets, compositions comprising freeze-dried platelets, and methods of use
US20060035383A1 (en) 2004-08-12 2006-02-16 David Ho Dry platelet preparations for use in diagnostics
US20060095121A1 (en) 2004-10-28 2006-05-04 Medtronic Vascular, Inc. Autologous platelet gel on a stent graft
WO2006059329A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2006-06-08 Hadasit Medical Research Services & Development Limited Platelet-derived microparticles for therapy
JP2008531553A (en) 2005-02-25 2008-08-14 メディジーンズ カンパニー リミテッド Pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of Avellino corneal dystrophy comprising plasma or serum
WO2008048229A2 (en) 2005-08-12 2008-04-24 Department Of The Army Stabilized lyophilized blood platelets
WO2008048228A2 (en) 2005-08-12 2008-04-24 Department Of The Army Glycine stabilized lyophilized plasma
ES2668551T3 (en) 2005-09-26 2018-05-18 Lifecell Corporation Dry platelet composition
US20070087061A1 (en) 2005-10-14 2007-04-19 Medafor, Incorporated Method and composition for creating and/or activating a platelet-rich gel by contact with a porous particulate material, for use in wound care, tissue adhesion, or as a matrix for delivery of therapeutic components
US20070178104A1 (en) 2006-01-31 2007-08-02 Awdalla Essam T Methods and means for treating solid tumors
WO2007121443A2 (en) 2006-04-17 2007-10-25 Bioe, Inc. Differentiation of multi-lineage progenitor cells to respiratory epithelial cells
US20070243137A1 (en) 2006-04-18 2007-10-18 Nanoprobes, Inc. Cell and sub-cell methods for imaging and therapy
US8529958B2 (en) 2006-10-17 2013-09-10 Carmell Therapeutics Corporation Methods and apparatus for manufacturing plasma based plastics and bioplastics produced therefrom
US8790924B2 (en) 2006-10-19 2014-07-29 Duke University Reversible platelet inhibition
WO2008073491A1 (en) 2006-12-11 2008-06-19 University Of Florida Research Foundation, Inc. System and method for analyzing progress of labor and preterm labor
US8097403B2 (en) * 2006-12-14 2012-01-17 Cellphire, Inc. Freeze-dried platelets, method of making and method of use as a diagnostic agent
EP1958618A1 (en) 2007-02-15 2008-08-20 Octapharma AG Method for freeze-drying with optimum reconstitution of biopolymers
US20110020107A1 (en) 2007-03-23 2011-01-27 Flodesign Wind Turbine Corporation Molded wind turbine shroud segments and constructions for shrouds
US8512697B2 (en) 2007-05-16 2013-08-20 The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Delivery of micro- and nanoparticles with blood platelets
DE102007028090A1 (en) 2007-06-12 2008-12-18 Eberhard-Karls-Universität Tübingen Universitätsklinikum Activatable diagnostic and therapeutic compound
US20100323950A1 (en) 2007-09-11 2010-12-23 Dorian Bevec Use of beta-melanotropin as a therapeutic agent, eg for the treatment of aids or alzheimer
WO2009049318A2 (en) 2007-10-12 2009-04-16 Bakaltcheva Irina B Freeze-dried plasma formats for the trauma care field
WO2009058876A1 (en) 2007-10-29 2009-05-07 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Method for a rapid antibody-based analysis of platelet populations
US20110008804A1 (en) 2007-11-05 2011-01-13 Kain Kevin C Angiopoietin-1 and -2 biomarkers for infectious diseases that compromise endothelial integrity
US8906855B2 (en) 2007-12-22 2014-12-09 Vivacelle Bio, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating conditions related to lack of blood supply, shock and neuronal injuries
TW200930811A (en) 2008-01-04 2009-07-16 Univ Nat Taiwan Science Tech Transfection reagent and method for enhancing transfection efficiency
EP2077118A1 (en) 2008-01-07 2009-07-08 Gwo Rei Biomedical Technology Corp. Clottable concentrate of platelet growth factors and preparation method thereof
EP2259774B1 (en) 2008-02-27 2012-12-12 Biomet Biologics, LLC Methods and compositions for delivering interleukin-1 receptor antagonist
WO2009135152A2 (en) 2008-05-02 2009-11-05 University Of Rochester Arrayed detector system for measurement of influenza immune response
US20100055067A1 (en) 2008-08-26 2010-03-04 Snu R&Db Foundation Perfluorocarbon conjugate as a blood substitute
WO2010046949A1 (en) 2008-10-22 2010-04-29 Inui Hiroaki Method for vitrification of cell, and container for vitrification of cell
EP2391341A4 (en) 2009-01-30 2012-05-09 Cuthbert O Simpkins Resuscitation fluid
CN102317447B (en) 2009-05-07 2015-06-10 加米达细胞有限公司 Method for selecting expanded stem cell population
US8715920B2 (en) * 2010-07-27 2014-05-06 Biovec Transfusion, Llc Composition for preserving platelets during photosensitization
EP2266635A1 (en) 2009-06-26 2010-12-29 Aarhus Universitet Three-dimensional nanostructured hybrid scaffold and manufacture thereof
WO2011020107A2 (en) 2009-08-14 2011-02-17 Georgetown University Compositions and methods for detection and treatment of breast cancer
EP2521444A2 (en) 2010-01-07 2012-11-14 Core Dynamics Ltd Method for preserving cancellous bone samples and preserved cancellous bone tissue
US20110183311A1 (en) 2010-01-27 2011-07-28 David Ho Dry platelet preparations for use in diagnostics
US9943075B2 (en) 2010-02-17 2018-04-17 Hememics Biotechnologies, Inc. Preservation solutions for biologics and methods related thereto
US20120100522A1 (en) 2010-04-06 2012-04-26 Genvault Corporation Stabilized chemical dehydration of biological material
US9061043B2 (en) 2010-10-13 2015-06-23 Duke University Aptamers to glycoprotein VI
RU2013108809A (en) 2010-10-14 2014-09-10 ОБЩЕСТВО С ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬЮ "НоваМедика" Nucleic Acid Modulators CLEC-2
US20140083628A1 (en) 2012-09-27 2014-03-27 Velico Medical, Inc. Spray drier assembly for automated spray drying
WO2012071135A2 (en) * 2010-11-23 2012-05-31 Biovec Transfusion, Llc Methods for removing pathogens from a platelet preparation
US20120134974A1 (en) 2010-11-30 2012-05-31 Biovec Transfusion, Llc Methods for removing plasma
IL210162A0 (en) * 2010-12-21 2011-03-31 Omrix Biopharmaceuticals Viral inactivated platelet extract, use and preparation thereof
JP2012143554A (en) 2010-12-24 2012-08-02 Toray Ind Inc Polysulfone-based hollow fiber membrane, hollow fiber membrane module for cleaning platelet suspension, and cleaning method of platelet suspension
JP2014518547A (en) 2011-04-07 2014-07-31 フェンウォール、インコーポレイテッド Automated method and system for providing platelet concentrates with reduced residual plasma volume and storage medium for such platelet concentrates
US20120321601A1 (en) 2011-05-17 2012-12-20 Qiyong Peter Liu Increased In Vivo Circulation Time of Platelets After Storage With A Sialidase Inhibitor
AU2012275562B2 (en) 2011-06-27 2016-10-20 Children's Healthcare Of Atlanta, Inc. Compositions, uses, and preparation of platelet lysates
SG11201501110XA (en) 2011-09-14 2015-04-29 Brian Anthony Lemper Inhalation systems, breathing apparatuses, and methods
KR101410065B1 (en) 2011-12-09 2014-06-27 테고사이언스 (주) Method for preserving valuable intracellular materials stably at room temperature
US9682104B2 (en) 2012-01-26 2017-06-20 Jadi Cell Llc Lyophilized platelet lysates
CN103524613A (en) 2012-07-04 2014-01-22 晶光源生技股份有限公司 Skin updating growth factor as well as application thereof to skin care and skin care product containing skin updating growth factor
WO2014051537A1 (en) 2012-09-25 2014-04-03 Biovec Transfusion, Llc Device and method for removing additives in the blood products
WO2014055949A1 (en) 2012-10-04 2014-04-10 Genesys Research Institute Platelet compositions and uses thereof
WO2014066142A1 (en) 2012-10-24 2014-05-01 Novamedica Limited Liability Company Nucleic acid regulation of growth arrest-specific protein 6 (gas6)
PL2912186T3 (en) 2012-10-24 2021-06-14 Platelet Targeted Therapeutics Llc Platelet targeted treatment
EP2926820B1 (en) * 2012-11-30 2017-08-30 Toray Industries, Inc. Method for preparing platelet solution replaced with artificial preservation solution
EP2934555B1 (en) 2012-12-21 2021-09-22 Astellas Institute for Regenerative Medicine Methods for production of platelets from pluripotent stem cells
ITRM20130054A1 (en) 2013-01-30 2014-07-31 Paolo Gresele TRANSFECTED PLATES WITH EXOGENOUS GENETIC MATERIAL AND MICROPARTELS DERIVED FROM THOSE TRANSFECTED PLATES, METHOD FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USES.
US9878011B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-01-30 Biomet Biologics, Llc Treatment of inflammatory respiratory disease using biological solutions
US9950035B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-04-24 Biomet Biologics, Llc Methods and non-immunogenic compositions for treating inflammatory disorders
US9895418B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-02-20 Biomet Biologics, Llc Treatment of peripheral vascular disease using protein solutions
EP3038551A4 (en) 2013-08-27 2017-03-08 Mayo Foundation for Medical Education and Research Cross-linked platelet material
US20160219870A1 (en) 2013-09-17 2016-08-04 Becton, Dickinson And Company Stabilization of Blood pH During Sample Storage
CA2927361A1 (en) 2013-10-16 2015-04-23 Mast Therapeutics, Inc. Diuretic induced alterations of plasma volume
JP6762876B2 (en) 2013-10-29 2020-09-30 ヴァーシティ ブラッド リサーチ インスティチュート ファウンデーション インク How to detect platelet-activated antibodies that cause heparin-induced thrombocytopenia / thrombosis
JP6702866B2 (en) 2013-11-18 2020-06-03 ルビウス セラピューティクス, インコーポレイテッド Synthetic membrane-receiver complex
WO2015109220A1 (en) 2014-01-17 2015-07-23 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Platelet decoy and use thereof
CN103907595A (en) 2014-04-18 2014-07-09 赵树铭 Trehalose-containing blood platelet low-temperature preserving fluid and application thereof
CN110822822B (en) 2014-06-09 2021-08-24 泰尔茂比司特公司 Lyophilization process
US20170198335A1 (en) 2014-06-10 2017-07-13 Biomatrica, Inc. Stabilization of Non-Denatured Polypeptides, Nucleic Acids, and Exosomes in a Blood Sample at Ambient Temperatures
ES2891555T3 (en) 2014-06-10 2022-01-28 Biomatrica Inc Platelet stabilization at room temperatures
CN107075478B (en) 2014-07-23 2021-11-09 塞鲁斯公司 Method for preparing platelet product
US20170274012A1 (en) 2014-09-03 2017-09-28 Entegrion, Inc. Acceleration of Reconstitution of Plasma Powder by Mixing with Small Beads
US9561184B2 (en) 2014-09-19 2017-02-07 Velico Medical, Inc. Methods and systems for multi-stage drying of plasma
WO2016057041A1 (en) 2014-10-09 2016-04-14 Biovec Transfusion, Llc Compositions and methods for preserving platelet function
CA3005311A1 (en) 2014-11-14 2016-05-19 Cellphire, Inc. Products and devices for controlling and stopping bleeding and methods of using
EP3265116B1 (en) 2015-03-04 2021-06-02 University of Rochester Systemic and topical application of platelet microparticles to treat bleeding in trauma patients
US10897891B2 (en) 2015-04-10 2021-01-26 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Compositions and methods for prolonged cell storage
EP3307283B1 (en) 2015-06-10 2020-09-02 Cellphire Inc. Composition and methods for treatment of loss of fluids leading to hypotension and/or hypovolemia
WO2016205009A1 (en) 2015-06-19 2016-12-22 The Regents Of The University Of California Treating infection by a platelet-targeting microbe using nanoparticles
WO2017027760A1 (en) 2015-08-12 2017-02-16 North Carolina State University Platelet membrane-coated drug delivery system
US20230248772A1 (en) 2015-08-28 2023-08-10 Cellphire, Inc. Products and methods using a platelet-derived hemostatic agent for controlling bleeding and improving healing
US20200281980A1 (en) 2015-08-28 2020-09-10 Cellphire, Inc. Products and methods using a platelet-derived hemostatic agent for controlling bleeding and improving healing
WO2017075038A1 (en) 2015-10-26 2017-05-04 Rana Therapeutics, Inc. Nanoparticle formulations for delivery of nucleic acid complexes
EP4219747A3 (en) 2015-11-20 2023-08-09 PreAnalytiX GmbH Method of preparing sterilized compositions for stabilization of extracellular nucleic acids
EP3402873A4 (en) 2016-01-14 2019-08-21 Cellphire Inc. Nucleated cell preservation by lyophilization
IL265102B2 (en) 2016-09-01 2023-11-01 Plas Free Ltd Human Blood-Derived Products Having Decreased Fibrinolytic Activity And Uses Thereof In Hemostatic Disorders
US10815456B2 (en) 2016-10-04 2020-10-27 Transwell Biotech Co., Ltd. Composition, kit and method for cryopreserving cells
CA3046455A1 (en) 2016-12-08 2018-06-14 Cellphire, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of loss of fluids leading to hypotension and/or hypovolemia
AU2018331418A1 (en) 2017-09-13 2020-03-19 Cellphire, Inc. Canine blood platelet preparations
US20230112136A1 (en) 2017-09-13 2023-04-13 Cellphire, Inc. Canine blood platelet preparations
JP7110360B2 (en) 2017-10-09 2022-08-01 テルモ ビーシーティー バイオテクノロジーズ,エルエルシー Freeze-drying method
CN108715834B (en) 2018-06-01 2021-09-14 天晴干细胞股份有限公司 Preparation method of platelet lysate rich in CD41+ and CD81+ microcapsules
WO2020023905A1 (en) 2018-07-27 2020-01-30 Cellphire, Inc. Cryopreserved platelet compositions and methods for making
US20200060262A1 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-02-27 Bloodworks Methods to reduce clot formation in cold-stored platelet products
CA3015457A1 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-02-24 Bloodworks Methods to reduce clot formation in cold-stored platelet products
US11088715B2 (en) 2018-08-31 2021-08-10 TE Connectivity Services Gmbh Communication system having a receptacle cage with an airflow channel
JP2022500501A (en) 2018-09-11 2022-01-04 セルフィアー インコーポレイテッド Plasma-containing composition
CN109942687B (en) 2018-10-16 2020-07-03 哈尔滨医科大学 68Ga-marked EACA modified c-Met molecular imaging probe, preparation and application
CA3121200A1 (en) 2018-11-30 2020-06-04 Cellphire, Inc. Platelets as delivery agents
US20230248771A1 (en) 2018-11-30 2023-08-10 Cellphire, Inc. Platelets loaded with anti-cancer agents
US11767511B2 (en) 2018-11-30 2023-09-26 Cellphire, Inc. Platelets as delivery agents
US20210180016A1 (en) 2019-11-27 2021-06-17 Cellphire, Inc. PLATELETS LOADED WITH mRNA
BR112021015887A8 (en) 2019-02-13 2023-04-11 Tigenix S A U METHOD FOR STEM CELL CRYOPRESERVATION, STEM CELL POPULATION, CRYOPRESERVATION COMPOSITION, USE OF NAC, AND CRYOPRESERVATION KIT
EP3937631A4 (en) 2019-03-13 2023-01-04 Cellphire Inc. Canine blood platelet preparations
US11529587B2 (en) 2019-05-03 2022-12-20 Cellphire, Inc. Materials and methods for producing blood products
CA3147618A1 (en) 2019-07-17 2021-01-21 Cellphire, Inc. Use of platelets in treating infections
AU2020334903B2 (en) 2019-08-16 2023-12-21 Cellphire, Inc. Thrombosomes as an antiplatelet agent reversal agent
US20220168353A1 (en) 2019-08-16 2022-06-02 Cellphire Inc. Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet induced coagulopathy
CA3150933A1 (en) 2019-08-16 2021-02-25 Cellphire, Inc. Thrombosomes as an anticoagulant reversal agent
WO2021046409A1 (en) 2019-09-05 2021-03-11 Cellphire, Inc. Materials and methods for blood plasma preparations
CA3163088A1 (en) 2019-11-27 2021-06-03 Cellphire, Inc. Platelet diagnostic imaging agents
WO2021158641A1 (en) 2020-02-03 2021-08-12 Malta Inc. Pumped heat electric storage system with dual-clutch powertrain system
CA3170201A1 (en) 2020-02-04 2021-08-12 Cellphire, Inc. Methods of treating congenital hemophilia with anti-fibrinolytic loaded platelets
WO2021232015A1 (en) 2020-05-15 2021-11-18 Cellphire, Inc. Platelet derived extracellular vesicles
US20220211029A1 (en) 2020-11-10 2022-07-07 Cellphire, Inc. Freeze-dried peripheral blood mononuclear cell compositions and methods
WO2022178177A1 (en) 2021-02-17 2022-08-25 Cellphire, Inc. Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet-induced coagulopathy
US20220273724A1 (en) 2021-02-17 2022-09-01 Cellphire Inc. Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet induced coagulopathy
WO2022178191A1 (en) 2021-02-17 2022-08-25 Cellphire, Inc. Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating anticoagulant-induced coagulopathy
US20220279777A1 (en) 2021-02-17 2022-09-08 Cellphire Inc. Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating anticoagulant-induced coagulopathy
CN113101737B (en) * 2021-03-04 2023-09-15 京美生命科技(杭州)有限公司 Affinity tangential flow filtration system, construction method thereof, exosome extraction method and application
WO2023081804A1 (en) 2021-11-04 2023-05-11 Cellphire, Inc. Platelet derivative compositions, and methods of making and using such compositions
US20230149467A1 (en) 2021-11-04 2023-05-18 Cellphire, Inc. Platelet derivative compositions, and methods of making and using such compositions

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11965178B2 (en) 2018-11-30 2024-04-23 Cellphire, Inc. Platelets loaded with anti-cancer agents

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11529587B2 (en) 2022-12-20
AU2020267368B2 (en) 2023-05-04
US11813572B2 (en) 2023-11-14
US20230226493A1 (en) 2023-07-20
AU2020267368A1 (en) 2021-12-23
US20230158455A1 (en) 2023-05-25
US11752468B2 (en) 2023-09-12
AU2023210528A1 (en) 2023-08-17
SG11202112054WA (en) 2021-11-29
WO2020227149A1 (en) 2020-11-12
IL287716A (en) 2021-12-01
KR20220016092A (en) 2022-02-08
EP3962499A1 (en) 2022-03-09
JP2022532262A (en) 2022-07-13
BR112021021984A2 (en) 2022-03-03
CN114072159A (en) 2022-02-18
CA3138529A1 (en) 2020-11-12
US20200346167A1 (en) 2020-11-05
EP3962499A4 (en) 2023-01-25
NZ782598A (en) 2024-05-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11752468B2 (en) Materials and methods for producing blood products
AU2005272821B2 (en) Methods for preparing freeze-dried platelets, compositions comprising freeze-dried platelets, and methods of use
US20200291356A1 (en) Canine blood platelet preparations
US20200046771A1 (en) Cryopreserved platelet compositions and methods for making
US20220168353A1 (en) Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet induced coagulopathy
US20220273724A1 (en) Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet induced coagulopathy
US20220279777A1 (en) Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating anticoagulant-induced coagulopathy
US20060051731A1 (en) Processes for preparing lyophilized platelets
US20230149467A1 (en) Platelet derivative compositions, and methods of making and using such compositions
US20230112136A1 (en) Canine blood platelet preparations
WO2022178177A1 (en) Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet-induced coagulopathy
US20190076478A1 (en) Canine blood platelet preparations
WO2023081804A1 (en) Platelet derivative compositions, and methods of making and using such compositions
WO2022178191A1 (en) Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating anticoagulant-induced coagulopathy
US20240307453A1 (en) Methods for controlling bleeding in a subject afflicted with hermansky pudlak syndrome using platelet derivative compositions
AU2022221719A1 (en) Freeze-dried platelet derivative compositions for treating antiplatelet-induced coagulopathy
WO2023220739A1 (en) Platelet derivative compositions for use in subjects afflicted with hermansky pudlak syndrome or bernard soulier syndrome
WO2024192173A1 (en) Hla-characterized platelet derivative compositions, and methods of making, selecting and using such compositions
JP2001131078A (en) New active immobilized platelet and method for preparing the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: CELLPHIRE, INC., MARYLAND

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:MONTGOMERY, JOSHUA DONALD;ISHLER, BRADEN CARL;AMOS, STEPHEN EDWARD;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20200506 TO 20200513;REEL/FRAME:064064/0458

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION